JP6832623B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined prize according to a display result of a variable display unit capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified.

As a slot machine of this type, for example, a slot machine capable of changing the visual mode of the reel by performing an effect on a liquid crystal display or the like arranged on the front surface of the reel has been proposed. In such a slot machine, the effect of changing the visual mode of the reel is not executed in the region where the effective line for which the winning is determined passes in the front region of the reel, and the visual mode of the reel is displayed in the region where the effective line does not pass. It has been proposed that the visibility on the effective line is not lowered by executing the effect of changing (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-142688

In the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, when some error occurs while the reel is fluctuating, the visibility of the area other than the effective line remains changed even if the visibility is secured only on the effective line. Then, it becomes difficult to grasp the status of the reel when an error occurs.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine that makes it easy to grasp the status of a variable display unit when a specific event that may be abnormal occurs. To do.

In order to solve the above problems, the slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention is used.
Equipped with a variable display unit that can variablely display multiple types of identification information that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
A winning determination means for determining whether or not a winning has occurred according to the identification information in a specific area of the display results derived to the variable display unit, and
Visibility changing means for changing the visibility of the display area in the variable display unit from normal visibility to special visibility, and
A change control means for executing change control for changing the visibility of a display area in the variable display unit by the visibility change means, and
A payout means capable of paying out the game medium to the outside when a prize is generated with the addition of the game medium after the display result is derived to the variable display unit.
The payout game medium detecting means for detecting the game medium paid out by the payout means, and
When a payout abnormality occurs in which the game medium is detected by the payout game medium detecting means during the period during the variable display of the variable display unit, the payout abnormality notification means for notifying the occurrence of the payout abnormality,
With
The change control means
It is possible to execute non-specific change control that changes the area other than the specific area in the display area of the variable display unit to a special visibility during the period during the variable display of the variable display unit as the game progresses.
When the occurrence of the payout abnormality is notified by the payout abnormality notification means in a situation where the non-specific change control is executed during the period during the variable display of the variable display unit with the progress of the game, the variable display unit is used. Let the visibility of the entire display area be normal visibility
It is characterized by that.
The slot machine of means 1 of the present invention
Equipped with variable display units (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variable display of multiple types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
A winning determination means for determining whether or not a winning has occurred according to identification information (design) in a specific area (area through which the winning line LN passes) among the display results derived to the variable display unit.
Visibility changing means (liquid crystal display 51) that changes the visibility of the display area (transparency region 51b) in the variable display unit from normal visibility (transparency state) to special visibility (state in which an image is displayed). When,
A change control means (sub control unit 91) that executes change control (reel front effect) for changing the visibility of the display area (transmission area 51b) in the variable display unit by the visibility change means.
When a specific event (error) that may have caused an abnormality occurs, a specific event notification means (error notification effect) that notifies the occurrence of the specific event, and
With
The change control means
During the period of variable display (during reel rotation) of the variable display unit with the progress of the game, the area other than the specific area (the area through which the winning line LN passes) of the display area (transparent area 51b) in the variable display unit is special. It is possible to execute non-specific change control (front effect during the game) that changes the visibility (the state in which the image is displayed).
A specific event (error) is caused by the specific event notification means in a situation where the non-specific change control (front effect during the game) is being executed during the period during the variable display (during reel rotation) of the variable display unit with the progress of the game. When the occurrence is notified, the visibility of the entire display area (entire transparent area 51b) in the variable display unit is set to the normal visibility (transparent state).
According to this feature, when the change control for changing the visibility of the display area in the variable display unit is executed during the period during the variable display of the variable display unit as the game progresses, of the display area in the variable display unit By making it possible to execute non-specific change control that changes an area other than a specific area to a special visibility, it is possible to change the visibility of a wide area as much as possible without deteriorating the visibility of the variable display unit in the specific area. On the other hand, when the occurrence of a specific event is notified in the situation where the non-specific change control is executed during the period during the variable display of the variable display unit as the game progresses, the entire display area of the variable display unit is notified. Since the visibility is set to the normal visibility, the situation of the variable display unit can be easily grasped even when a specific event is notified in such a situation.

The visibility changing means for changing the visibility of the display area in the variable display unit from the normal visibility to the special visibility in the means 1 is, for example, the front side (player side) of the display area in the variable display unit. ) Is provided with a transmissive display device (liquid crystal display, EL display, light guide plate, etc.) to provide normal visibility in which an image is not displayed or is transparent on the front side of the display area in the variable display unit. An image is displayed or a state in which the transmittance is reduced to change the visibility to a special state, and a movable object that can be superimposed on the front side of the display area in the variable display unit is provided in the variable display unit. A thing that changes the normal visibility where movable objects do not overlap on the front side of the display area to a special visibility where movable objects overlap, a backlight is placed on the back side of the variable display unit, and the backlight is in normal color (white) Etc.), and the normal visibility, which is a state of emitting light at normal illuminance, is changed to a special visibility by changing the color of the backlight, the illuminance, and turning on / off.

The slot machine of the means 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to the means 1.
The change control means
Change control (reel front effect) can be executed even during the period when the variable display unit does not change (the period when the reel is stopped).
The occurrence of a specific event (error) is notified by the specific event notification means in a situation where change control (reel front effect) is executed during a period in which the variable display unit does not change (a period in which the reel is stopped). In this case, the visibility of the entire display area (entire transmission area 51b) in the variable display unit is set to the normal visibility (transmission state).
According to this feature, the status of the variable display unit even when the occurrence of a specific event is notified when a specific event occurs while the change control is being executed during the period when the variable display unit does not change. It is possible to easily grasp the above, and it is possible to standardize the control when notifying a specific event in the situation where the change control is being executed regardless of whether or not the variable display unit is in the variable display.

The slot machine of means 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 1 or 2.
When a predetermined event (door opening) that may have caused an abnormality and is different from the specific event occurs, a predetermined event notification means (door opening notification effect) for notifying the occurrence of the predetermined event is provided.
The change control means is provided by the predetermined event notification means in a situation where the non-specific change control (front effect during the game) is being executed during the period during the change display (during reel rotation) of the variable display unit as the game progresses. When the occurrence of a predetermined event (door opening) is notified, the non-specific change control (front effect during the game) is continued.
According to this feature, depending on the importance of the event to be notified, it is set whether the visibility of the entire display area in the variable display unit is the normal visibility or the non-specific change effect is continued. be able to.

The slot machine of means 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
It is equipped with a standby effect execution means that executes a standby effect (demo effect, power saving mode) when the standby condition is satisfied when no game is being played.
When the standby effect (demo effect, power saving mode) is executed, the change control means changes the visibility of the entire display area (entire transparent area 51b) in the variable display unit to normal visibility (transparent state). It is characterized by the fact that.
According to this feature, the state of the variable display unit can be easily grasped in a state where the game is not performed.
In addition, when a plurality of types of standby effects are provided, the visibility of the entire display area in the variable display unit may be set to normal visibility when at least one type of standby effects is executed.

The slot machine of means 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The prize-winning determination means is characterized by having a plurality of gaming states having different specific areas (areas through which the winning line passes) for determining whether or not a prize has been generated according to the identification information (design).
According to this feature, in a situation where the non-specific change effect is executed during the period during the variable display of the variable display unit as the game progresses, regardless of which of the plurality of game states in which the specific area is different. When the occurrence of a specific event is notified, the situation of the variable display unit can be easily grasped by setting the visibility of the entire display area in the variable display unit to the normal visibility, and any game can be played. Even in the state, it is possible to standardize the control when notifying a specific event in the situation where the change control is executed.

The slot machine of means 6 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The specific event is characterized by a fluctuation abnormality (rotation error) of the variable display unit.
According to this feature, the state of the variable display unit can be easily grasped when a fluctuation abnormality of the variable display unit is notified.

The slot machine of means 7 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 6.
A control means (main control unit 41) that controls based on a program, and
An address storage means (vector table) that can store the address of the interrupt program (timer interrupt process (main)) for executing the interrupt process, and
A determination means for determining at startup whether or not the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is within a predetermined range (the area of the program area in which the program or the like is actually stored).
When it is determined that the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is not within the predetermined range, the start limiting means (in the main control unit 41, the address of the vector table is in the program area of the program or the like. If it is not the area actually stored, it will not be started),
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an unintended interrupt process from being executed in advance.

The slot machine of means 8 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 7.
A control means (main control unit 41) that controls based on a program, and
Setting means for setting the control means (setting of various functions performed with reference to HW parameters) and
With
The control means executes processing based on a program (game program or non-game program) after the setting by the setting means is performed, and prohibits interruption (starting) before the processing based on the program is started. Interruption prohibition setting by time setting)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an unintended interruption from occurring.

The slot machine of means 9 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 8.
A plurality of timer value storage areas (for example, 1-byte timers A to C) and
When any of a plurality of types of time timing conditions (for example, 1-byte timers A to C) is satisfied, a timer value storage area (for example, 1-byte timer A) corresponding to the time timing conditions is satisfied. To C), a timer value storage means (main process) for storing the timer value according to the timing condition, and
A timer value updating means (time counter updating process) capable of updating the timer values stored in a plurality of timer value storage areas (for example, 1-byte timers A to C) every predetermined cycle (about 2.24 ms).
With
Consecutive addresses (804CH to 804EH) are assigned to a plurality of timer value storage areas (for example, 1-byte timers A to C) according to a predetermined rule (+1).
The timer value update means performs a predetermined operation (designated address + 1) for an update process (process of subtracting 1 from the value indicated by the pointer) for updating the timer value stored in the timer value storage area corresponding to the specified address. The feature is that multiple types of timer values can be updated by repeatedly executing while changing the specified address for the timer value storage area.
According to this feature, a plurality of timer value storage areas are assigned consecutive addresses according to a predetermined rule, and an update process for updating the timer values stored in the timer value storage area corresponding to the specified address is specified. Since multiple types of timer values are updated by repeatedly executing while changing the specified address for the timer value storage area by performing the operation of, when performing the process of updating multiple types of timer values for each type of timer value. The program capacity can be reduced.
It should be noted that the assignment of consecutive addresses according to a predetermined rule means that, for example, an address to which N (N is a natural number) is added from the start address and the start address is assigned.
In addition, changing the designated address for the timer value storage area by performing a predetermined operation means, for example, changing the designated address by adding or subtracting a value according to the number of processes to the current designated address. It corresponds to changing the designated address by adding or subtracting a constant from the reference address. At this time, the value or constant according to the number of processes may differ depending on the storage capacity of the timer value. For example, in the configuration where the timer value is stored byte by byte, the value according to the number of processes is the number of processes. Depending on the number of processes, it becomes 1, 2, 3 ..., And the constant becomes 1, but if the configuration is such that the timer value is stored by 2 bytes, the value according to the number of processes becomes 2, 4, 6 ... Depending on the number of processes. , The constant is 2.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control part. It is a figure which shows the memory map of ROM and RAM mounted on the main control part. It is a figure which shows the detail of the memory map of ROM and RAM mounted on the main control unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of a game program and a non-game program. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game area and a non-game area. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of processing when calling a non-game program from a process based on the game program during execution of the main process, and (b) is based on the game program during execution of the timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of processing when calling a non-game program from processing. It is a figure which shows the area of the RAM which the main control part initializes when the 1st condition and the 2nd condition are satisfied. (A) is a timing chart showing the output timing of the medal OUT signal and the security signal output by the main control unit to the external output board when an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game is detected, and (b) is a security signal. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the output timing of. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the main process executed by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel control processing which the main control part executes. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation start processing executed by the main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the stop control table setting process executed by the main control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the type of a special role, the symbol combination of a special role, and the technical matter related to a special role. It is a figure for demonstrating the type of a small combination, the symbol combination of a small combination, and the technical matter related to a small combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the type of the re-game combination, the symbol combination of the re-game combination, and the technical matter related to the re-game combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol combination of the transition roll, and the technical matter related to the transition roll. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a figure which shows the outline of the game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery target combination read out as the lottery target combination for each game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery target combination read out as the lottery target combination for each game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery target combination read out as the lottery target combination for each game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the combination which a prize is allowed by the lottery target combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the combination which a prize is allowed by the lottery target combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of winning a plurality of small wins. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of winning a plurality of re-game combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of winning a plurality of re-game combination. It is a figure which shows the winning number and transmission number of a special combination in the 1st internal winning command transmitted by a main control unit. It is a figure which shows the winning number and transmission number of a general combination and a re-game combination in the second internal winning command transmitted by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal winning command setting process performed by the main control unit. It is a figure which shows the navigation number in the push order command transmitted by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the push order command setting process performed by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the winning judgment command setting process performed by the main control unit. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the reel front effect which a sub-control unit executes. It is a figure for demonstrating the transmittance in a transmission region of a liquid crystal display. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of error notification effect executed by a sub-control unit. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the error notification effect which a sub-control unit executes. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the notification effect during setting change which a sub-control unit executes. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the standby effect which a sub-control unit executes. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a reel LED. It is a figure for demonstrating the lighting mode of the reel LED according to the execution state of the reel front effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the control content of a reel LED and a transmission area concerning the backlight effect which a sub-control unit executes and the dark display mode of the transmission area of a liquid crystal display. It is a figure which shows the modification of the lighting mode of a reel LED. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the accessory effect which a sub-control unit executes.

A mode for carrying out the slot machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

An embodiment of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a housing 1a having an open front surface and a side of the housing 1a. It is composed of a front door 1b rotatably supported at the end.

As shown in FIG. 2, inside the housing 1a of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, and right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer circumference are arranged. ) Are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. It is arranged like this.

As shown in FIG. 3, "red 7", "blue 7", "white 7", "BAR", "watermelon", "cherry a", and "cherry" are formed on the outer circumferences of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively. Twenty-one each of a plurality of mutually distinguishable symbols such as "b", "bell", "replay a", "replay b", and "plum" are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3 provided at substantially the center of the front door 1b.

Each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIG. 4) provided corresponding to each, so that the symbols of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are continuous with the perspective window 3. While the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped rotating, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the perspective window 3 as a display result.

Inside the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, there are reel sensors 33L, 33C and 33R that detect the reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C and 2R from the back. , Are provided. Further, the reel LED 55 is composed of 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of reels 2L, 2C and 2R, and each symbol can be independently irradiated.

A display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is arranged at a position on the front side (player side) of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a liquid crystal panel that has transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and passes through the transmission region 51b and the perspective window 3 corresponding to the perspective window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 1b has a medal insertion section 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player-owned game value). In use, the maximum number of medals among the specified number of medals determined according to the gaming state within that range (in this embodiment, 3 is specified as the specified number of RT0 to 4 described later, and 2 is specified as the specified number of RB. MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting (is), medals stored as credits and medals used for setting the number of bets are settled (the medals used for setting the credits and the number of bets are returned. Settlement switch 10 operated at the time of), start switch 7 operated at the start of the game, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated at the time of stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, respectively. The effect switches 56 used for the above are provided so as to be operable by the player.

In this embodiment, of the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that have started to rotate, the reel that stops first is referred to as the first stop reel, and the stop is referred to as the first stop. Similarly, the reel that stops second is called the second stop reel, the stop is called the second stop, the reel that stops third is called the third stop reel, and the stop is called the third stop. Alternatively, it is called a final stop.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front door 1b shows a credit display 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and the contents when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 that displays an error code, information that can identify the reel stop order by the navigation notification described later, 1 BETLED 14 that notifies by lighting that the bet number is set to 1, and 2 bets are set. 2BETLED15 that notifies by lighting that the number of bets is set, 3BETLED16 that notifies by lighting that the number of bets is set 3, insertion request LED17 that notifies by lighting that a medal can be inserted, and a game by operating the start switch 7. A start effective LED18 that notifies by lighting that the start operation is valid, and a lighting that notifies that the wait (a state of waiting for the start of rotation of the reel because a certain period of time has not passed since the previous game start) is in progress. A game display unit 13 provided with a weighting LED 19 and a replaying LED 20 for notifying by lighting that a replay game is in progress is provided.

Inside the MAXBET switch 6, a BET switch effective LED21 (see FIG. 4) is provided to notify by lighting that the bet number setting operation by operating the MAXBET switch 6 is effective, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside the 8R, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 4) are provided to notify by lighting that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective. An effect LED 56a (see FIG. 4) is provided inside the effect switch 56 to notify by lighting that the operation of the effect switch 56 is effective.

Further, the upper position of the front door 1b can be moved to a storage position that is housed inside the front door 1b below the upper surface portion of the front door 1b and a protruding position that protrudes upward from the upper surface portion of the front door 1b. An accessory 300 having a protruding body 301 is provided. The projecting body 301 can move forward and backward between the storage position and the projecting position by driving the effect motor 305 (see FIG. 4). Further, inside the projecting body 301, a rotating light 302 that can be turned on while rotating in a predetermined mode is provided, and when the projecting body 301 is in the storage position and in the projecting position, the rotating light It is possible to light and rotate the 302. Further, the projecting body 301 is provided with a transparent case body 303 surrounding the rotating light 302, and when the projecting body 301 is moved to the projecting position, a player or the like can use the rotating light 302 in the projecting body 301. In addition to being inaccessible, when the rotary light 302 is lit and rotated at the protruding position, the lighting and rotation can be visually recognized from the player side through the case body 303. Further, the front portion (player side) of the accessory 300 is made of a transparent transparent panel 306 so that the player or the like cannot touch the projecting body 301 located at the storage position, and the player side. The light emission of the rotating lamp of the projecting body 301 stored in the storage position can be visually recognized through the transparent panel 306 and the case body 303.

Inside the front door 1b, as shown in FIG. 2, a reset switch 23 for detecting an error state described later and a reset operation for canceling a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, and a change of a setting value described later. A setting value display 24 that displays the setting value at that time while checking the middle or setting value, and a hit that controls the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until the reset operation is performed) at a predetermined trigger. Stop switch 36a for selecting enable / disable of the stop function, automatic control to automatic settlement processing (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at a predetermined trigger The automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting the enable / disable of the settlement function and the flow path of the medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are provided on the side of the hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) described later provided inside the housing 1a. Alternatively, a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either one of the medal payout outlet 9 side, an insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank 34a side, and an insertion medal sensor. A medal selector 29 having a slot sensor 26 for detecting the insertion of foreign matter on the upstream side of 31 and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

Inside the housing 1a, as shown in FIG. 2, the above-mentioned reels 2L, 2C, 2R, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIG. 4), and the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are respectively. Reel unit 2 composed of detectable reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal (see FIG. 4), and medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are stored. The hopper tank 34a, the hopper motor 34b (see FIG. 4) for paying out the medals stored in the hopper tank 34a from the medal payout outlet 9, and the payout sensor 34c (see FIG. 4) for detecting the medal paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b (see FIG. 4). A hopper unit 34 and a power supply box 100 (see FIG. 4) are provided.

An overflow tank 35 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a is provided on the side of the hopper unit 34. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full tank sensor 35a (see FIG. 4) for detecting that the stored medals are full is provided.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front surface of the power supply box 100 functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in normal times. However, in the setting change state, the reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of the winning probability (ball output rate) of the internal lottery described later, and the power supply that is operated when the power is turned on / off. A switch 39 is provided.

Since the power supply box 100 is provided inside the housing 1a and the front door 1b can be opened by a predetermined key operation possessed by a clerk or the like, the power supply box 100 is provided on the front surface of the power supply box 100. The setting key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power switch 39 can be operated only by a clerk or the like who has the key, and cannot be operated by the player. The same applies to the reset switch 23 detected by a predetermined key operation. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires further key operation after opening the front door 1b by key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the setting key switch 37 among the clerk of the amusement park. It is possible to operate.

When playing a game on the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, or the number of bets is set using credits. To use the credit, operate the MAXBET switch 6. When the specified number of bets determined according to the game state is set, the winning line LN (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. Become. In this embodiment, 3 cards are set as the specified number of bets in RT0 to 4 described later, and 2 cards are set as the specified number of bets in RB described later, and the specified number is set according to these gaming states. When the number of bets is set, the winning line LN becomes valid. If more than the maximum number of medals are inserted out of the specified number corresponding to the gaming state, that amount will be added to the credit.

The winning line is a line set to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a combination of winning symbols. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, only the winning line LN set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the middle stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, and the middle stage of the reel 2R, that is, the middle stage is used as the winning line. It is set. In this embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to make it easy to recognize that the winning line LN has a combination of symbols constituting the winning, the invalid lines LM1 to 4 are set separately from the winning line LN. The invalid lines LM1 to LM1 to 4 are not determined to win by the combination of the symbols aligned with the invalid lines LM1 to 4, but are invalid lines when the winning line LN has a combination of symbols constituting a specific winning. By configuring the combination of symbols (for example, bell-bell-bell) that will be awarded when the winning line LN is aligned with any of LM1 to LM4, the symbols constituting the winning line LN are the symbols that constitute a specific winning. This makes it easier to recognize that the combinations are complete.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 2C, and the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the lower stage of the invalid lines LM1 and the reel 2L set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the upper stage. , Lower reel 2C, lower reel 2R, that is, invalid line LM2 set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the lower row, upper reel 2L, middle reel 2C, lower reel 2R, that is, lined down to the right. However, there are four types of invalid line LM: invalid line LM3 set across the symbols, lower row of reel 2L, middle row of reel 2C, upper row of reel 2R, that is, invalid line LM4 set across the symbols lined up to the right. It is defined as.

Further, in this embodiment, as a winning combination, when a predetermined combination of symbols defined as a winning combination (for example, "bell-watermelon-cherry b") is prepared, a prize is awarded and a predetermined symbol is obtained. When the combinations are aligned, the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are aligned with the symbol combinations (for example, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon") that are indicators that are easier to recognize than the predetermined symbol combinations, so that the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are aligned. Includes roles that can be made to appear as if they have won a prize by combining the symbols aligned with any of the above. In the following, when a predetermined combination of symbols is aligned with the winning line LN, the combination of symbols aligned with any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 is referred to as a symbol combination as an index, and a combination of symbols as an index is configured. The symbol is called an index symbol.

When the start switch 7 is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously changed. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the perspective window 3.

When all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined combination of symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as a combination) on the winning line LN is displayed on each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. If the game is stopped as a result, a prize will be generated, and a number of medals determined according to the prize will be given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the maximum number of credits (50 in this embodiment) is reached, medals are directly paid out from the medal payout outlet 9 (see FIG. 1). Further, when the combination of symbols accompanied by the transition of the gaming state stops on the winning line LN as the display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the combination of symbols is shifted to the gaming state according to the combination of symbols. ..

In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all the reels are stopped. In addition, one unit of control (game control) for executing the game starts when all the controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

Further, in this embodiment, the configuration using three reels is illustrated, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, and a configuration using four or more reels may be used. In the configuration using two or more reels, the winning may be determined based on the combination of the display results derived to all the two or more reels. Further, in this embodiment, the variable display device is configured by a physical reel, but the variable display device may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

Further, in the slot machine 1 in the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated to start the fluctuation of the symbol, one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated. When this is done, the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped and the symbol is stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds).

The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate 80 times per minute and change the symbol for 80 x 21 (the number of symbol frames per reel) = 1680 frames, so that a maximum of 4 symbols can be drawn in 190 ms. You will be able to do it. That is, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols up to 4 frames ahead of the stops, for a total of 5 frames.

Therefore, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, when the symbol displayed at the bottom of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol is up to 4 frames ahead. Since the symbol can be displayed in the lower row, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch when any of the stop switches 8L and 8R is operated in each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. Designs arranged within 5 frames including the above can be displayed on the winning line.

In the following, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may be simply referred to as reels when it is not necessary to distinguish them. Further, the reel 2L may be referred to as a left reel, the reel 2C may be referred to as a middle reel, and the reel 2R may be referred to as a right reel. Further, the operation of stopping the reels 2L, 2C and 2R by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R may be referred to as a stop operation.

FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game control board 40 controls the game state, and the effect control board 90 controls the game state. The effect is controlled according to the above, and the drive power supply for the electric components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 101 and supplied to each part.

An AC100V power supply is supplied to the power supply board 101 from the outside, and a DC voltage required for driving the electric components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply, so that the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are generated. It is supposed to be supplied to. Further, the above-mentioned hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full tank sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

On the game control board 40, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the stop switch 36a, the automatic settlement switch 36b, the input medal sensor 31, and the door open. The detection switch 25, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the payout sensor 34c, the full tank sensor 35a, the setting key switch 37, and the reset / setting switch 38 described above are connected via the power supply board 101. The detection signals of these connected switches are input. Further, on the game control board 40, the above-mentioned credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1-3 BETLED 14 to 16, input request LED 17, start effective LED 18, wait LED 19, replay LED 20, BET switch effective LED 21, left. , Middle, right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, set value display 24, flow path switching solenoid 30, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are connected, and the hopper motor 34b described above is connected via the power supply board 101. These electric components are connected and are driven based on the control of the main control unit 41 described later mounted on the game control board 40.

The game control board 40 has a main control unit 41 that performs processing related to the progress of the game and directly or indirectly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40, and an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency. A control clock generation circuit 42 that generates a control clock CCLK, a random clock generation circuit 43 that generates a random clock RCLK that is an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency different from the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, and a game control board. The switch detection circuit 44 that takes in the detection signal input from the switches connected directly to the 40 or via the power supply board 101 and transmits it to the main control unit 41, and the motor drive signal (stepping) output from the main control unit 41. The motor drive circuit 45 that transmits the phase signal of the motor to the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, the solenoid drive circuit 46 that transmits the solenoid drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the main control. The LED drive circuit 47 that transmits the LED drive signal output from the unit 41 to various indicators and LEDs connected to the game control board 40 and the voltage of the power supply supplied to the slot machine 1 are monitored to reduce the voltage drop. A power failure detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the main control unit 41 when it is detected, and the main control unit 41 in a state where the power supply is unstable, such as when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off. It is equipped with a reset circuit 49 that gives a system reset signal to the device.

FIG. 5 shows a configuration example of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 is a one-chip microcomputer, and includes an external bus interface 501, a clock circuit 502, a collation block 503, a unique information storage circuit 504, an arithmetic circuit 505, a reset / interrupt controller 506, and the like. CPU (Central Processing Unit) 41a, ROM (Read Only Memory) 41b, RAM (Random Access Memory) 41c, free run counter circuit 507, random number circuits 508a, 508b, timer circuit 509, and interrupt controller 510. A parallel input port 511, a serial communication circuit 512, a parallel output port 513, and an address decoding circuit 514 are provided.

The reset / interrupt controller 506 is for controlling various resets and interrupt requests that occur inside or outside the main control unit 41. The reset / interrupt controller 506 includes an out-of-designated area travel prohibition (IAT) circuit 506a and a watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. The IAT circuit 506a is a circuit that monitors whether or not the user program is correctly executed in the designated area, and has a function of outputting an IAT generation signal when it detects that the user program is executed outside the designated area. Further, the watchdog timer 506b has a function of generating a timeout signal for each set period.

The external bus interface 501 is a bus interface having an interface function between the external bus and the internal bus of the chip constituting the main control unit 41, an address bus, a data bus, and a direction control function for each control signal. The clock circuit 502 is a circuit that generates the internal system clock SCLK by dividing the control clock CCLK by two or the like. The collation block 503 has a function of connecting to an external collation machine and collating chips. The unique information storage circuit 504 is a circuit that stores a plurality of types of unique information that is internal information of the main control unit 41. The arithmetic circuit 505 is a circuit that performs multiplication and division.

The CPU 41a is a control CPU that executes game control in the slot machine 1 by executing a user program (game control processing program for game control) based on the control code read from the ROM 41b. When such game control is executed, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 41a reads fixed data from the ROM 41b, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 41a writes various variable data to the RAM 41c and temporarily stores them, and a CPU 41a is temporarily stored in the RAM 41c. Variable data read operation to read various variable data, CPU 41a receives input of various signals from the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, parallel input port 511, serial communication circuit 512, etc., CPU 41a Also performs transmission operations such as outputting various signals to the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, the serial communication circuit 512, the parallel output port 513, and the like.

The ROM 41b stores a control code indicating a user program (game control processing program for game control), fixed data, and the like. The RAM 41c provides a work area or the like for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 41c may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power supply. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 41c is stored for a predetermined period.

An 8-bit free run counter is mounted as the free run counter circuit 507. The random number circuits 508a and 508b are circuits that generate numerical data such as 8-bit random numbers and 16-bit random numbers that are random number values having a predetermined update range. In this embodiment, the hardware random number generated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b out of the random number circuits 508a and 508b is used as a random number for internal lottery described later. The timer circuit 509 is a 16-bit programmable timer, which counts down the set timer value based on the input of the control clock CCLK, and outputs an interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller when it reaches 0000H. In this embodiment, the timer circuit 509 can be used to perform periodic interrupt requests and time measurement.

The interrupt controller 510 is a circuit that controls an external interrupt request from an interrupt terminal and an interrupt request from a built-in peripheral circuit (for example, serial communication circuit 512, random number circuits 508a, 508b, timer circuit 509). .. The parallel input port 511 has a built-in 8-bit wide input-only port. Further, the parallel output port 513 included in the main control unit 41 shown in FIG. 4 has a built-in 11-bit wide output dedicated port. The serial communication circuit 512 is a circuit that performs asynchronous serial communication in input / output to the outside.

The address decoding circuit 514 is a circuit for decoding each functional block inside the main control unit 41 and decoding a chip select signal which is a decoding signal for an external device. The chip select signal enables the internal circuit of the main control unit 41 or an external device as a peripheral device to be selectively and effectively operated to be accessed from the CPU 41a.

For example, when the main control unit 41 accesses an area of the storage area of the ROM 41b in which a program or the like is not stored, or when the main control unit 41 accesses an area of the storage area of the RAM 41c for which access prohibition is set. That is, by generating an illegal access reset when there is an access to a memory area that is not accessed in normal operation, the progress of the game is disabled, and the unused area and operation of ROM 41b are disabled. Even when an illegal program is stored in an area unrelated to the above, an unused area of the RAM 41c, or the like, it is possible to prevent the illegal program from being executed.

Further, the main control unit 41 is started when an internal or external reset occurs. At this time, the value set in the vector table assigned to the ROM 41b and where the start address of the interrupt process is set. However, it is judged whether it is a value indicating unused or a value indicating the area where the program etc. is actually stored, and if it is neither of the values, it is not started and interrupts. It is possible to prevent in advance that an unintended process is executed due to an occurrence or the like.

The main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513. The command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is sent in only one direction, and the command is not sent from the sub control unit 91 to the main control unit 41. Further, in this embodiment, the command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513, that is, the command is transmitted as a parallel signal, but the command is transmitted via the serial communication circuit 512. A configuration in which a command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, that is, a configuration in which the command is transmitted as a serial signal may be used.

Further, the main control unit 41 inputs the detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 from the parallel input port 511. Then, the main control unit 41 executes the main process of gradually shifting according to the detection states of the various switches input from the parallel input ports 511. Further, the main control unit 41 can interrupt the main process and execute the interrupt process when the interrupt occurs. In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment) when a timeout occurs in the timer circuit 509. Further, the main control unit 41 is set to automatically prohibit other interrupts during the execution of the interrupt process, and when a plurality of interrupts occur at the same time, a predetermined order is obtained. The interrupt to be executed with priority is set. If another interrupt factor occurs during the execution of the interrupt process and the interrupt factor continues even after the interrupt process is completed, the interrupt is interrupted when the interrupt process is completed. The ban will be automatically lifted, at which point a new interrupt will occur. In addition, it is set to automatically prohibit other interrupts during the execution of the interrupt process, and the interrupt prohibition is not automatically canceled when the interrupt process is completed, but the interrupt process is performed. Other interrupts may be prohibited by the program at the start, and the interrupt prohibition may be canceled by the program at the end of the interrupt process.

The main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the processing according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes as the main processing, and responds to the change in the detection state of the various switches. Execute the process of gradual migration. Further, the main control unit 41 executes the timer interrupt process (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). The execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to be longer than the total time of the time in which the process repeated according to the control state in the main process completes and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main). This means that the process of repeating the timer interrupt process (main) between this time and the next time according to the control state always completes at least one cycle.

The effect switch 56, the standby effect switch 57, and the effect limit switch 58 are connected to the effect control board 90 so that the detection signals of the effect switch 56, the standby effect switch 57, and the effect limit switch 58 are input. It has become. Further, an effect device such as a liquid crystal display 51, an effect LED 52, a speaker 53, 54, a reel LED 55, and an accessory 300 is connected, and these effect devices are a sub-control unit described later mounted on the effect control board 90. It is driven based on the control by 91. Further, the accessory sensor 304 provided inside the accessory 300 is connected so that it can be specified whether the projecting body 301 is located at the storage position or the projecting position based on the output of the accessory sensor 304. It has become. In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53, 54, the reel LED 55, and the accessory 300. However, apart from the sub control unit 91, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board, and the sub control unit 91 is connected to the main control unit 41. The output pattern of the effect device may be determined based on the command, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit may be used. The output control of the effect device is performed by both the 91 and the output control unit. Further, in this embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53, 54, the reel LED 55, and the accessory 300 are exemplified as the effect device, but the effect device is not limited to these, and the effect device is not limited to these, for example, mechanical. A display device driven by a reel or a mechanically driven accessory may be applied as a directing device.

The effect control board 90 includes a sub control unit 91 composed of a microcomputer provided with a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and an I / O port 91d to control the effect, and a liquid crystal display 51 connected to the effect control board 90. The display control circuit 92 that controls the display, the effect LED 52, the LED drive circuit 93 that controls the drive of the reel LED 55, and the audio output circuit 94 that controls the audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, when the power is turned on or A reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, and a switch detection circuit 96 that detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the effect control board 90. , The clock device 97 that outputs time information including date information and time information, and when the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 is monitored and a voltage drop is detected, a voltage drop signal indicating that fact is sent to the sub CPU 91a. A power failure detection circuit 98 that outputs to the device, other circuits, and the like are mounted.

The sub CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40 to perform various controls for performing the effect, and directly or indirectly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90. ..

In the game control board 40, the reset circuit 95 has a lower voltage for releasing the reset signal than the reset circuit 49 that gives the system reset signal to the main control unit 41, and the sub control unit 91 controls the main control when the power is turned on. It is designed to start at an earlier stage than the unit 41. On the other hand, the power failure detection circuit 98 is set to have a lower voltage for outputting the voltage drop signal than the power failure detection circuit 48 for outputting the voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41 on the game control board 40, and is set to have a lower voltage when the power is cut. The sub control unit 91 detects a power failure at a stage later than that of the main control unit 41, and performs a power failure process (sub) described later.

Further, the standby effect switch 57 is arranged inside the front door 1b, and the standby effect executed by the sub control unit 91 when the main control unit 41 is controlled to the standby state is used as a normal demonstration effect. It is a switch that allows you to select whether to use a power saving mode that consumes less power than the demo effect, and by operating the switch by a clerk, etc., it corresponds to either the demo effect or the power saving mode. The signal is input to the effect control board 90.

Further, the effect limiting switch 58 is arranged inside the front door 1b, and in the accessory effect using the accessory 300 executed by the sub control unit 91, the effect 300 is operated from the storage position to the protruding position. It is a switch that can select whether or not to limit, and when the switch is operated by a clerk or the like, a signal corresponding to either limiting or not limiting the operation of the accessory 300 is sent to the effect control board 90. It is supposed to be entered.

Like the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 has an interrupt function, generates an interrupt when receiving a command from the main control unit 41, and acquires a command transmitted from the main control unit 41. , Executes command reception interrupt processing to be stored in the buffer. Further, the sub control unit 91 generates an interrupt every time the number of system clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every fixed time interval (about 2 ms), and executes a timer interrupt process (sub) described later. Further, unlike the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 interrupts the process when an interrupt occurs based on the reception of a command, even if the timer interrupt process (sub) is being executed. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the same time, and even if the interrupt that triggers the timer interrupt process (sub) occurs at the same time, the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority. Further, the backup power supply is also supplied to the sub control unit 91 at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power supply is supplied.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. More specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using the winning probability according to the set value in the lottery that affects the advantage to the player such as the internal lottery, the navigation stock lottery, and the additional lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is.

In order to change the set value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 37. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed as a display value on the setting value display 24, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Move to the changed state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated by 1 (when the setting value 6 is further operated, the setting value is changed to 1). go back). Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is fixed as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the confirmed display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the game shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

It should be noted that, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 37 is on, the setting change state may be entered on condition that the door open detection switch 25 detects the opening of the front door 1b. Well, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting from being changed illegally when the front door 1b is not opened. Further, in the configuration of shifting to the setting change state on the condition that the detection corresponding to the opening of the front door 1b is performed, the door opening detection switch 25 corresponds to the opening of the front door 1b after shifting to the setting change state. It is preferable to maintain the setting change state even if the detection is not performed. Therefore, even if the front door 1b is temporarily closed during the setting change, the operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed again. It is not necessary and the setting change operation is not complicated. Further, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off after the start switch 7 is operated to confirm the set value after shifting to the setting change state, the door open detection switch 25 detects the front door 1b to be opened. On the condition that the setting is changed, the setting change state may be terminated and the game may proceed to a state in which the game can proceed. Even in such a configuration, the front door 1b is illegally opened. It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed.

Further, in order to confirm the set value, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on after the game is finished and the bet number is not set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value display 24 displays the setting value read from the RAM 41c, so that the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the progress of the game is impossible, and by turning off the setting key switch 37, the setting confirmation state ends and the game returns to the state in which the progress is possible.

After the game is over, when the setting key switch 37 is turned on when the number of bets is not set, it is a condition that the door opening detection switch 25 detects the opening of the front door 1b. In addition, the configuration may shift to the setting confirmation state, and such a configuration can prevent the setting value from being illegally confirmed when the front door 1b is not opened. Further, in the configuration of shifting to the setting confirmation state on condition that the detection corresponding to the opening of the front door 1b is performed, the door opening detection switch 25 corresponds to the opening of the front door 1b after shifting to the setting confirmation state. It is preferable to maintain the setting confirmation state even if the detection is not performed. Therefore, even if the front door 1b is temporarily closed during the setting confirmation, the operation for shifting to the setting confirmation state again is performed. It is not necessary and the setting confirmation operation is not complicated. Further, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off after the start switch 7 is operated and the set value is confirmed after the transition to the setting confirmation state, the door open detection switch 25 detects the front door 1b to be opened. On the condition that the setting is confirmed, the setting confirmation state may be terminated and the game may be returned to the state in which the game can proceed. Even in such a configuration, the front door 1b is illegally not opened. It is possible to prevent the set value from being confirmed.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not a voltage drop signal from the power failure detection circuit 48 is detected each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. When the determination process is performed and it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected in the power failure determination process, the power failure process (main) for setting the data for determining whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the next recovery is performed. Execute.

Then, the main control unit 41 returns the processing state of the main control unit 41 to the state before the power failure based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, provided that the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of its activation. However, when the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the RAM abnormality error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormality error state, and the progress of the game is disabled.

The error state shifts to the normal error state that is canceled by the reset operation (operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23) and the setting change state described above, and is canceled until a new setting value is set. The RAM error state is a special error state, including the special error state without, and once controlled to the RAM error error state, it shifts to the setting change state and is released until a new setting value is set. Will not be done.

Further, the sub control unit 91 also determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98 is detected in the timer interrupt process (sub), and when it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected, At the next return, the power interruption process (sub) for setting the data for determining whether the data in the RAM 91c is normal is executed.

Then, the sub-control unit 91 returns the processing state of the sub-control unit 91 to the state before the power failure based on the data stored in the RAM 91c, provided that the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of its activation. However, when the data in the RAM 91c is not normal, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM 91c is initialized. In this case, unlike the main control unit 41, only the RAM 91c is initialized, and the execution of the effect is not disabled.

Further, even if it is determined that the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of its activation, the sub control unit 91 is activated when it receives a setting command described later indicating that the setting has been changed from the main control unit 41. The RAM 91c is initialized even when neither the return command nor the setting command, which will be described later, indicating that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been restored is received even after a certain period of time has elapsed. In this case as well, only the RAM 91c is initialized, and the execution of the effect is not disabled.

Next, the initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The usable area of the storage area of the RAM 41c is divided into a game RAM area, an unused area 4, and a non-game RAM area (see FIG. 7B). Further, the game RAM area is divided into a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack area. The special work is a work in which data that is not initialized even if the set value is changed is stored, and software random numbers, set values, data indicating the game state, and the like are stored. The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of a specific game state (RB, BB) is stored, and is the LED display data, input port, output port input / output data, and game time. The timekeeping counter etc. are stored. The general work is a work in which data that can be initialized at the end of a specific game state is stored, and a stop symbol, the number of medals to be paid out, and the like are stored. The unused area 3 is a work that is not used in any of the programs. The game stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main control unit 41 is stored during execution of the game program described later.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 displays the data of the RAM 41c when the setting key switch 37 is started when the setting key switch 37 is ON and the data of the RAM 41c is destroyed when the setting key switch 37 is started. Each initial is when the initialization condition consisting of five is satisfied: when it is not destroyed, when the setting change state is finished, when the specific game state (RB, BB) is finished, and when one game is finished. Five types of initialization with different regions to be initialized are performed according to the conversion conditions.

Initialization 0 is initialization performed when the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of startup with the setting key switch 37 ON, and initialization 0 initializes all the usable areas. .. The initialization 1 is the initialization performed when the data of the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of starting with the setting key switch 37 ON, and in the initialization 1, the area other than the special work of the game RAM area is not. All areas of the game RAM area are initialized. The initialization 2 is the initialization performed after the setting change state is completed by starting the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, and in the initialization 2, the special work and the game stack area (in use) in the game RAM area. Areas other than) are initialized. The initialization 3 is an initialization performed at the end of a specific game state, and in the initialization 3, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area are initialized. The initialization 4 is an initialization performed at the end of one game, and in the initialization 4, the unused area 3 of the game RAM area and the game stack area (unused) are initialized. The storage area of the data indicating the set value and the game state is allocated to the special work, and the data of the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of starting with the setting key switch 37 ON, that is, the data of the RAM 41c. If is normal and the setting is changed, the set value and the data indicating the game state will be retained. Further, the storage area of the timer counter, which will be described later, is allocated to the important work, and is held without being initialized at the end of the game or the end of a specific game state.

Further, when the main control unit 41 of this embodiment executes the above-mentioned initialization, the start address and the end address are specified as the RAM addresses to be initialized, so that the main control unit 41 is one byte from the specified start address. After overwriting the data of 1 with 0, the logical sum of the 1-byte data is calculated, and if the calculation result is 0, the process of moving to the next address is repeated until the specified end address is reached. , Initializes the RAM area in the specified address range.

When the main control unit 41 in this embodiment is activated due to the occurrence of a reset, the main control unit 41 is set at startup. In the startup setting, the status flag provided in the main control unit 41 is initialized. The status flag is data that holds the state of the operation result and the execution result of the instruction, and particularly includes the interrupt master permission flag that sets the prohibition / permission of interrupt. Since the initial value of the interrupt master permission flag is a value indicating the prohibition of interrupts, the main control unit 41 is started in a state where interrupts are prohibited. After that, after setting various functions by referring to the HW parameters described later, when a reset occurs according to the program stored in the program / data area, it is started in the interrupt-prohibited state and then executed first. Start the initial setting process.

In the initial setting process, the main control unit 41 first sets the interrupt to prohibit, then determines whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state at startup, and the setting key switch 37 is ON at startup. When it is determined that the state is in the state, the process shifts to the setting change process, and the RAM 41c is initialized at the start of the setting change process. At this time, if the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the special work is held and the other areas are initialized so that even after the setting is changed, a part of the control state (set value, game state, etc.) before the change can be obtained. On the other hand, when the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the abnormality in the data in the RAM 41c can be surely eliminated by initializing all the areas of the usable area including the special work. It has become.

After initializing the RAM 41c, interrupt is set to allow, the set value is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 6 each time the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and after the ON of the start switch 7 is detected, The set value when the ON of the setting key switch 37 is detected is stored in the RAM 41c, and the setting change process is completed.

In this way, the initial value of the interrupt master permission flag is a value indicating that interrupts are prohibited, and the main control unit 41 is started in a state where interrupts are prohibited, and even in the initial setting process after startup, first , Since the initial setting process is executed after the interrupt is set to prohibit, it is possible to prevent an unintended interrupt from occurring.

Further, after the setting change processing is completed, the main control unit 41 executes a main process for stepwise processing according to the progress of the game for each game unit. Further, in the main process, the RAM 41c is initialized for each game unit, and the RAM 41c is also initialized at the end of the setting change process. Then, after the setting change process is completed, the main process is started from the stage before the process of initializing the RAM 41c in the main process, and the initialization of the RAM 41c after the setting change process is completed and the game unit. Initialization of each RAM 41c can be performed by a common process.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment initializes a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by executing a game area initialization process in the setting change process and the main process. In the game area initialization process, the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated by designating the start address and end address of the initialization target RAM, and the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated from the start address of the initialization target RAM. By sequentially clearing the minutes area, the area of the designated initialization target RAM in the game RAM area is initialized.

By specifying the start address and end address of the RAM to be initialized, the start address is set as the initial value of the specified address, and the process of updating the specified address to the next address after clearing the data of the specified address is performed. The area from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM may be initialized by repeatedly executing until the designated address becomes the end address.

In the non-gaming area initialization process of this embodiment, the RAM area corresponding to the capacity of the initialization target RAM is sequentially cleared from the start address of the initialization target RAM (the start address of the unused area 4), so that the initialization target RAM The area from the start address to the end address of, that is, the unused area 4 and the non-game RAM area are initialized.

By specifying the start address and end address of the RAM to be initialized, the start address is set as the initial value of the specified address, and the process of updating the specified address to the next address after clearing the data of the specified address is performed. The area from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM may be initialized by repeatedly executing until the designated address becomes the end address.

Further, in the non-gaming area initialization process of the present embodiment, by setting the start address of the unused area 4 as the start address of the initialization target RAM, all the areas of the unused area 4 and the non-game area RAM area are initialized. However, the non-game area initialization process may be performed as long as at least a part of the non-game RAM area is initialized, and a part of the non-game RAM area is initialized. However, a part of the non-gaming RAM area and the unused area 4 may be initialized.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the game area initialization process and the non-game area initialization process, the 1-byte data stored in the designated address is overwritten with 0 to clear the data, and then the logic of the 1-byte data is performed. The sum is calculated to determine whether or not the calculation result is 0, and if the calculation result is not 0, the 1-byte data is overwritten with 0 to clear the data of the corresponding address. The configuration is such that the data is cleared, but a configuration in which the 1-byte data stored in the specified address is overwritten with 0 and cleared may be used.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, a specified number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state (RT0 to RT4, RB) (in this embodiment, 3 for RT0-4 and 2 for RB) is determined. Therefore, it is possible to start the game on the condition that a predetermined number of bets set according to the gaming state is set. In this embodiment, the winning line LN is activated when a predetermined number of bets are set according to the gaming state.

Then, in this embodiment, when all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the activated winning line (in the case of this embodiment, all winning lines are always activated, so that the following is valid. A winning line is obtained when a combination of symbols called a role is aligned on the winning line (the winning line is simply called the winning line). The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols.

The types of winning roles are determined according to the game status, but they can be broadly divided into small roles that involve paying out medals and re-starting the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There is a game role and a special role with a transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player. In the following, the small role and the replay role are collectively referred to as the general role. In order for each winning combination determined according to the game state to be won, it is necessary to win the internal lottery described later and set the winning flag of the winning combination in the RAM 41c. Of the winning flags for each of these winning combinations, the winning flags for the small winning combination and the replaying combination are valid only in the game in which the flags are set, and are invalid in the next game, but the winning flags for the special winning combination are , It is valid until the combinations of the allowed combinations are complete by the flag, and is invalid in the game in which the combinations of the allowed combinations are complete. That is, once the winning flag of the special role is won, even if the combination of the winning combination permitted by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

Next, the internal lottery of this embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, before the display results of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived, whether or not the main control unit 41 allows the winning of each of the above-mentioned winning combinations (specifically, the start switch 7). Is determined at the time of detection). In the internal lottery, first, a random number value (an integer of 0 to 65535) for the internal lottery is acquired when the start switch 7 is detected. Specifically, the value generated by the random number circuit 508b and stored in the random number value register of the random number circuit 508b is set in the lottery work assigned to the RAM 41c. Then, for each combination determined according to the game state (RT0-4, RB), the numerical data stored in the lottery work and each combination determined according to the current game state, the number of bets, and the set value. Judgment as to whether or not to allow a prize is made according to the number of judgment values of.

In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined according to the winning combination, the current game state, and the set value to be the target of the internal lottery is sequentially added to the random number value for the internal lottery (numerical data stored in the lottery work). When the numbers are added and the result of the addition overflows, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Therefore, the winning combination is won with a probability (number of determination values / 65536) according to the magnitude of the number of determination values.

Then, the winning number indicating the result of the internal lottery is set in the RAM 41c. The winning number is used for setting an internal winning flag, navigating notification, command creation, stopping control of reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the like.

When the winning of any of the winning combinations is determined, the winning flag corresponding to the winning combination determined based on the winning number is set in the internal winning flag storage work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work is composed of a 2-byte storage area, in which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storage work in which the winning flag of the special combination is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general combination. It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when the special role is won, the winning flag of the special role indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storage work, and when the general role is won, the general role is won. A general role winning flag indicating that effect is set in the general role storage work. If none of the combinations and combinations of combinations are won, the special combination storage work and the general combination storage work are cleared.

Next, the stop control of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R will be described. The main control unit 41 inputs the winning number, the table index stored in the ROM 41b, and the table creation data when the reel starts to rotate and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating remains. Refer to it and create a stop control table for each spinning reel. Then, when any operation corresponding to the rotating reel among the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referenced stop control table is slipped. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R.

In this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is set as the number of sliding frames, and it is possible to pull in a maximum of 4 symbols to stop the reel after detecting the stop operation. That is, the stop position of the symbol can be specified from a range of up to 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. Further, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to pull in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation to stop the reel, and stop when the stop operation is detected. It is possible to specify the stop position of a symbol from a range of up to 5 symbols including the operation position.

In this embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, when the stop operation is performed, the winning winning combinations can be stopped together on the winning line within a pull-in range of up to 4 frames. If possible, control is performed to align and stop the winning combination, and control is performed to stop the winning combination without aligning it within a pull-in range of a maximum of 4 frames. If the special role and the small role are won at the same time, such as when the special role is carried over from before the previous game and the small role is won, the maximum on the winning line is when the stop operation is performed. If the winning small wins can be aligned and stopped within the pull-in range of 4 frames, the control is performed to align and stop the small wins that have been won within the pull-in range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. If it is not possible to draw in, if it is possible to align and stop the winning special roles in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, control is performed to align and stop them, and the winning combination is Control is performed to stop the game without aligning it within the pull-in range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, the control of aligning the small winning combination on the winning line is prioritized over the special winning combination, and the special winning combination can be won only when the small winning combination cannot be drawn in. If the special role and the small role can be drawn in at the same time, only the small role will be drawn in, and the small role will not be aligned on the winning line at the same time as the special role. In addition, when a special role and a small role are won at the same time, the control to align the special role on the winning line is prioritized over the small role, and only when the special role cannot be drawn in, the small role is placed on the winning line. Alignment control may be performed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the special role and the re-game combination are won at the same time, such as when the special role is carried over from before the previous game and the re-game combination is won, the stop operation is performed. At that time, control is performed so that the symbols of the re-game combination are aligned and stopped within a pull-in range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-game combination or the symbols constituting the re-game combination to be elected at the same time are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within 4 frames for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Since it can always be stopped at any position within the pull-in range of 4 frames, if the special role and the re-game combination are won at the same time, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. Instead, all the re-game roles will be awarded. That is, in such a case, the control of aligning the re-game combination on the winning line is prioritized over the special combination, and the re-game combination is sure to win the prize. If the special role and the re-game role can be drawn in at the same time, only the re-game role will be drawn in, and the special role will not be aligned on the winning line at the same time as the re-game role.

In this embodiment, the reel stop control is performed using a stop control table that can specify the number of slip frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. However, the stop position that can specify the stop position can be specified. A configuration that specifies the stop position from the table and stops the reel at the specified stop position, and searches for a stop position that can be stopped at the timing when the stop operation is performed without using the stop control table or stop position table. A configuration that performs stop control to specify and stop the reel at the specified stop position, stop control using the stop control table, stop control using the stop position table, and stop without using the stop control table or stop position table. A configuration in which stop control by searching and specifying a stop position may be used together, or a configuration in which a stop control table or a stop position table is partially changed to perform stop control may be used.

In the present embodiment, after the start of the game, each time the rotation of the reel is started, the main control unit 41 measures the game time, which is the time elapsed from the time when the rotation of the reel is started. After the end of one game, a specified number of bets are set by inserting medals, etc., and when the game start operation is performed with the game start operation enabled, the reel rotation of the previous game starts. If the game time at which the time counting is started from the time point is equal to or longer than the specified time (4.1 seconds in this embodiment), that is, if the specified time has elapsed from the reel rotation start time of the previous game, no wait is generated. At that point, the rotation of the reel for the game in the game is started. On the other hand, after the end of one game, a specified number of bets are set by inserting medals, etc., and when the game start operation is performed with the game start operation enabled, the reel rotation of the previous game starts. If the game time at which timing is started from that point is less than the specified time, that is, if the specified time has not elapsed since the start of reel rotation in the previous game, a wait is generated and the reel rotation is started at that point. Instead, the game waits until the game time at which timing is started from the start of reel rotation of the previous game reaches the specified time, and when the specified time is reached, the rotation of the reel is started.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls to output an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence status, and the like. These external output signals are output to hall equipment such as a hall computer via an information providing terminal board of a game store (hall) in which the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed.

The main control unit 41 has a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a prize, and a game state of RB (regular bonus). An RB signal indicating that the game is in progress, a BB signal indicating that the game state is in BB (big bonus), an ART signal indicating the start of ART described later, a door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is open, which will be described later. A setting change signal indicating that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode, an insertion error signal indicating an abnormality of the medal selector, and a payout error signal indicating an abnormality of the hopper unit 34 are output.

The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit, a parallel / serial conversion circuit, terminals for each output signal, and a connector to be connected for electrically connecting to the circuit of the information providing terminal board. Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, the RB signal, the BB signal, and the ART signal are directly output to the information providing terminal board as pulse signals via the relay circuit. .. On the other hand, the door open signal, the setting change signal, the input error signal, and the payout error signal are converted into a security signal which is a serial signal that can be individually identified by the parallel serial conversion circuit to provide information. It is output to the terminal board.

Next, a command transmitted by the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 will be described.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 gives the sub control unit 91 a number of input commands, a credit command, a game state command, an ART state command, an internal winning command, a push order command, a freeze command, an ART lottery result command, and the like. Reel acceleration information command, acceleration completion command, stop operation command, slip frame number command, stop command, game end command, winning judgment command, payout start command, payout end command, standby command, stop command, error command, return command , Sends multiple types of commands, including setting commands, setting confirmation commands, door commands, and operation detection commands. These commands consist of 1-byte type data indicating the type of the command and 1-byte extended data indicating the content of the command, and the sub-control unit 91 can determine the type of the command from the type data.

The number of inserted medals command is a command that can specify the number of inserted medals, that is, the number of medals used to set the number of medals, and is a state from the end of the game (after changing the setting) to the start of the game. , Or when a medal is inserted in a state where the specified number of bets is not set, or when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number, the medal is transmitted. Further, since the input number command is transmitted when the bet number setting operation is performed, it is possible to identify that the bet number setting operation has been performed by receiving the input number command.

The credit command is a command that can specify the number of medals stored as credits, is a state from the end of the game (after changing the setting) to the start of the game, and in a state where a specified number of bets are set. Sent when a medal is inserted and credits are added.

The game state command is a command that can specify the game state (RT0 to 4, RB) of the game, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

The ART status command is a command that can specify whether or not AT is in progress, whether or not it is in ART, the number of games remaining until the specified number of games described later is reached, the number of games remaining in the precursory period, and the number of games remaining in ART. , When the game starts and is sent after the game state command.

The internal winning command is a command that can specify the internal lottery result, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game and after the ART status command. The internal winning command includes a first internal winning command that can specify whether or not a special combination has been won, and a second internal winning command that can specify whether or not a general combination has been won. After the first internal winning command is transmitted, the second internal winning command is transmitted.

The push order command is a command that can specify the stop order, and is a stop when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, after the internal winning command is transmitted, and due to the stop operation of each reel. Each time control is performed, it is sent after the stop command is sent. In a game in which the navigation notification described later is executed, a push order command capable of specifying a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted from the start of the game, and in a game in which the navigation notification described later is not executed, an advantageous stop is performed. A push order command that cannot specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player is transmitted until the order is confirmed, and a push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player is transmitted from the time when the advantageous stop order is determined. To.

The game status command, ART status command, and internal winning command are transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated and the game starts. Therefore, by receiving these commands, the start switch 7 is operated and the game starts. It is possible to identify that.

The freeze command is a command that can specify whether or not the game is controlled to a freeze state that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period, and if it is controlled to the freeze state, the type can be specified, and when the game starts. It is sent after the internal winning command is sent.

The ART lottery result command is a command that can specify whether or not the ART lottery or the additional lottery, which will be described later, has been won, the number of games of the winning ART or the number of games to be added, and is when the game starts and the ART is started. It is transmitted after the internal winning command is transmitted in the game in which the lottery or the additional lottery is performed.

The reel acceleration information command is a command that can specify that the reel rotation starts as the game progresses, and is transmitted when the reel rotation starts as the game progresses. Since it is also transmitted when the rotation of the reel is started with the end of the freeze state, after the start of the freeze state is specified by the freeze command, the reel acceleration information command is received to accompany the progress of the game. Not only the rotation of the reel starts, but also the end of the frozen state can be specified.

The acceleration completion command is a command that can specify that the acceleration of the reel accompanying the start of the game is completed, and after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started when the game is started, all of them are first performed. It is transmitted when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate at a constant speed.

The stop operation command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, or the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, and is used for the stop operation of each reel. It is transmitted every time the accompanying stop control is performed.

The slide frame number command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and the number of slide frames that move from the stop operation of the corresponding reel to the stop. Therefore, each time the stop control associated with the stop operation of each reel is performed, the corresponding stop operation command is transmitted and then transmitted.

The stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, or the area number of the stop position of the corresponding reel, and is a stop control associated with the stop operation of each reel. Is sent after the corresponding slip frame count command is sent each time.

The stop operation command, the number of sliding frames command, and the stop command can all specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and are accompanied by the stop operation of each reel. Since it is transmitted every time the stop control is performed, it is possible to specify that the stop operation of any of the reels has been performed and the reel to be stopped by receiving these commands.

The game end command is a command that can specify that the game has ended, and is transmitted when the player presses the stop switch to stop the third stop reel and releases the stop switch.

The winning judgment command is a command that can specify whether or not there is a winning, the combination of symbols aligned on the winning line LN, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, so that the player stops the third stop reel. It is when the stop switch is pressed and the stop switch is released, and is transmitted after the game end command is transmitted.

Both the game end command and the winning judgment command are transmitted when the player presses the stop switch to stop the third stop reel and releases the stop switch. Therefore, by receiving these commands, It is possible to identify that all the operations necessary for advancing one game have been completed.

The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning a prize or settlement of credits (including the medal used for setting the number of bets) is started. In addition, the payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning a prize and settlement of credits is completed.

The standby command is a command indicating that the game shifts to the standby state, and when the game shifts to the standby state after the estimated end time (60 seconds in this embodiment) elapses without setting the number of bets after one game ends, credits are given. It is sent after the payout of medals by settlement (including the medal used to set the number of bets) is completed and the payout end command is sent.

The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and when the ending effect waiting time elapses after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or cancellation of an error state and the type of error state. When an error is determined and controlled to an error state, an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state and its type is sent and reset. When the operation is performed and the error state is cleared, an error command indicating the error state is cleared is sent.

The return command is a command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power failure, and is transmitted when the main control unit 41 returns to the control state before the power failure.

The setting command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change. When the setting change state is entered, the setting command indicating the start of the setting change state is sent, and when the setting change state ends. A setting command indicating the end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change is sent. Further, since the control state of the main control unit 41 is initialized with the transition to the setting change state, it is possible to specify that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized by the setting command indicating the start of the setting. ..

The setting confirmation command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting confirmation state. When the setting confirmation state is entered, the setting confirmation command that indicates the start of the setting confirmation is sent, and the setting that indicates the end of the setting confirmation is sent when the setting confirmation state ends. A confirmation command is sent.

The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25, that is, on (open state) / off (closed state), and is the number of bets for the next game when the power is turned on and when one game ends (after the game ends. Is transmitted when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 changes (from on to off, from off to on).

The operation detection command is a command indicating the detection state (on / off) of the operation switches (MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R), and is transmitted at regular time intervals.

Of these commands, commands other than the operation detection command are generated in the main process, temporarily stored in the command queue provided in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the subsequent command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main).

On the other hand, the operation detection command is generated based on the detection state of the switch every time the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main) is executed 10 times, and is temporarily stored in the command queue provided in the RAM 41c. , It is transmitted in the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main) after that.

Next, the effect control executed by the sub control unit 91 based on the command transmitted by the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described. When the sub control unit 91 receives a command from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 executes a command reception interrupt process. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer, and if an unprocessed command is stored, the earliest of them. The control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to based on the command received in the step, and the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speaker 53, 54, the reel LED 55, etc. are referred to based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table. Controls the output of various production devices. In the control pattern table, for each of a plurality of types of effect patterns, a display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, a lighting mode of the effect LED 52, an output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, a lighting mode of the reel LED 55, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub-control unit 91 receives a command, the sub-control unit 91 of the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. Among them, the control pattern corresponding to the type of the received command is referred to, and the output control of the effect device is performed based on the control pattern. As a result, the effect according to the effect pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

If the sub-control unit 91 receives a new command during the execution of the effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub-control unit 91 stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed and uses the newly received command. An effect based on the corresponding control pattern is executed. That is, even if the production is not completed to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new production is performed unless the new command received is not the command that triggers the new production. The effect based on the command will be executed.

When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b, and when the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command, it is stored in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The registered selection rate is referred to, one of the effect patterns is selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. Therefore, even if the same command is received, a different control pattern is selected depending on the effect pattern selected when the internal winning command is received, and as a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 has a notification period during which navigation notification can be executed to notify the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to control the assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT).

When the main control unit 41 is controlled by the AT, the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification by winning the navigation target combination according to the game state, and the player is based on the winning number of the winning navigation notification combination. By notifying the stop order that is advantageous to the sub-control unit 91 and transmitting a push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player based on the winning number to the sub-control unit 91, the liquid crystal display 51 and the like. The navigation effect using is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute the navigation notification and execute the navigation effect by satisfying certain conditions even in the normal state not controlled by the AT.

FIG. 6 is an address map of the memory area used by the main control unit 41. As shown in FIG. 6, the memory area used by the main control unit 41 includes a memory area (0000H to 7FFFH) allocated to the ROM 41b and a memory area (F000H to FFFFH) allocated to the RAM 41c.

The memory area of the ROM 41b includes a program / data area (0000H to 26FFH) in which a program and fixed data are stored, a ROM comment area (2700H to 277FH) in which arbitrary data such as a program title and version can be set, and a later description. Vector table area (2780H to 27A7H) where the upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt process (main) are set, and the parameters for setting the internal functions of the main control unit 41 in terms of hardware. The HW parameter area (27A8H to 27FFH) in which is set and the unused area (2800H to 7FFFH) in which access is prohibited are included.

The parameters set in the HW parameter area in the ROM 41b include the final address (HPRGEND) of the ROM area used in the program / data area, the start address (HRAMSTAT) and the final address (HRAMEND) of the RAM area for which access is prohibited.

The memory area of the RAM 41c is an internal function register area (F4B0H to F4B0H) in which a usable area (F000H to F400H) that can be used as a work and a register group for controlling each function mounted on the main control unit 41 are stored. F6FFH) and unused areas (F401H to F4AFH, F700H to FFFFH) whose access is prohibited.

FIG. 7 is an address map of the program / data area in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41 and the usable area in the RAM 41c.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the program / data area in the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a game data area in which game data used by the game program is stored, and a game data area in which the game data used by the game program is stored. It includes a used area 1, a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of a game is stored, a non-game data area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is stored, and an unused area 2. ..

The progress of the game is to proceed with a series of processes that compose the game, and if it is a slot machine, at the stage where the number of bets can be set and the game can be started, the game is started and the reels are rotated. The stage of causing the reel to be stopped, the stage of deriving the display result, and the stage of giving the value of a medal or the like according to the display result are advanced.

The game program area related to the progress of the game and the non-game program not related to the progress of the game are separately allocated, and are allocated rearward in the storage area of ROM 41b among the game program area and the non-program area. Since an unused area 1 of at least 16 bytes or more is allocated to the area in front of the non-programmed area, a game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game are stored in the storage area. It can be easily identified according to the difference between the two.

Further, the game program area and the game data area, and the non-game program area and the non-game data area are allotted to continuous areas, while the game program area and the game data area related to the progress of the game and the non-game area not related to the progress of the game. Since the game program and the non-game data area are allocated to areas that are not continuous with an unused area 1 of at least 16 bytes or more in between, the game program area and the game data area related to the progress of the game and the progress of the game The non-game program and the non-game data area, which are not involved, can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

In the above, the front and back of the storage area are the magnitude relations of the address values assigned to the storage area, and the smaller address is the front and the larger address is the rear. Therefore, the storage area allocated after the one storage area corresponds to the storage area having an address value larger than that of the one storage area, and the storage area allocated before the one storage area. , A storage area whose address value is smaller than that of one storage area is applicable.

Further, the game program may be allocated behind the non-game program area, and the unused area may be allocated in front of the game program allocated behind the non-game program area. A game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

Further, the game program area and the non-game program area may be allocated to adjacent areas with the unused area 1 in between, and even with such a configuration, the game program area related to the progress of the game , A non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game can be easily identified according to the difference in the storage area.

Further, since 0 values are stored in all the unused areas 1 and 2 of the program / data area of the ROM 41b, the game program area and the game data area, the non-game program area and the non-game data, The unused areas 1 and 2 can be easily distinguished, and even when invalid data is stored in the unused areas 1 and 2, it can be easily found.

It should be noted that 1 may be stored in all the unused areas 1 and 2 of the program / data area of the ROM 41b, and even in such a configuration, the game program area, the game data area, and the non-game The program area and non-game data can be easily distinguished from the unused areas 1 and 2, and even when invalid data is stored in the unused areas 1 and 2, it can be easily found. ..

Further, if the game program area and the non-game program area are allocated to separate areas, the game program area and the non-game program area may be allocated to adjacent areas. Even with such a configuration, the game program area related to the progress of the game and the non-game program not related to the progress of the game can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

Further, both the game program area and the non-game program area start from an address (0H) in which the lower four digits have the same value when the address is expressed in binary, and the program / data area of ROM 41b. Of these, the game program area related to the progress of the game and the non-game program area not related to the progress of the game can be easily distinguished from other areas.

Further, both the game program area and the non-game program area not only start from an address having the same 0 in the lower 4 digits when the address is expressed in binary, but also the value in the lower 1 digit when the address is expressed in hexadecimal. Starts from the same 0 address (0H), so the game program area and the non-game program area can be easily distinguished from other areas not only when the address is expressed in binary not only but also when it is expressed in hexadecimal. can do.

In both the game program area and the non-game program area, regardless of whether the address is expressed in binary or hexadecimal, the lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) starts from the address having the same value. The game program area and the non-game program area can be easily distinguished from other areas. For example, the value of the lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) digits is the same 1. The same effect can be obtained with a configuration starting from the address of.

As shown in FIG. 7B, the usable area of the RAM 41c includes a game RAM area used as a work by the game program, a non-game RAM area used by the non-game program as a work, and an unused area 4. The game RAM area includes a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack area in which the game program saves data, and the non-game RAM area includes a game. An area that can be referred to by the program, an area that cannot be referred to by the game program, and a non-game stack area in which the non-game program saves data are included. In this embodiment, the game stack area and the non-game stack area are individually provided in different areas, but a single stack area shared by the game program and the non-game program may be provided.

The unused area 3 is an area in which neither the game program nor the non-game program is used, and is an area that is surplus with respect to the game RAM area having a predetermined capacity.

Further, the unused area 4 is an area of 16 bytes or more in which neither the game program nor the non-game program is used. Since the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are allocated to areas that are not continuous with the unused area 4 in between, the game RAM area used by the game program related to the progress of the game and the non-game RAM area not related to the progress of the game The non-game RAM area used by the game program and the non-game RAM area can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

In the following, the game program area, the game data area, and the game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a game area, and the non-game program area, the non-game data area, and the non-game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a non-game area. .. Further, the unused area 1, the unused area 2, the unused area 3 and the unused area 4 may be collectively referred to as an unused area.

Based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, the main control unit 41 permits access to the available area of the RAM 41c when the access is prohibited in the program / data area of the ROM 41b. When there is access to an area that is not set to, when there is access to an area other than the program / data area in ROM 41b, or when there is access to an area other than the usable area in RAM 41c. That is, since the progress of the game is disabled by generating an illegal access reset when there is an access to a memory area that is not accessed in normal operation, an area that is not related to the unused area or operation of the ROM 41b. Even when an illegal program is stored in an unused area of the RAM 41c, it is possible to prevent the illegal program from being executed.

In particular, in this embodiment, the game program area and the non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, and the game program area is assigned to the front of the non-game program area behind the game program area. An unused area 1 is allocated to the area, and a group of programs / data areas including an area from the start address of the game program area to the final address of the non-game program based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. While the access to the area (the area from the game program area to the non-game data area) is collectively set to allow, the other areas, that is, the game program, the game data, and the non-game program among the program / data areas, Since access to the area after the non-game data in which the non-game data is not stored is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control by a malicious program or illegal data.

Further, in the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, the game area is allocated behind the non-game program area, and the unused area is in front of the game program area behind the non-game program area. Is assigned, and access to a group of areas including the area from the start address of the non-game program area to the final address of the game program in the program / data area is collectively based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. Even if access to other areas is prohibited while setting the permission, it is possible to prevent unintended control by malicious programs and malicious data.

A game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area, and an unused area 1 is allocated to an area behind the game program area and before the non-game program area, and the program / data. Of the areas, to a group of areas including the game program area (area from the game program area to the game data area) and to a group of areas including the non-game program (area from the non-game program area to the non-game data area). Access may be set to allow each and access to other areas may be prohibited. Even with such a configuration, the program / data area to the area where the game program or non-game program is not stored Since access to the data is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control by malicious programs and malicious data. Further, in the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, the game area is allocated behind the non-game program area, and the unused area is in front of the game program area behind the non-game program area. Is assigned, and a group of areas including the game program area (the area from the game program area to the game data area) and a group of areas including the non-game program (from the non-game program area to the non-game area) in the program / data area. Access to each of the areas up to the data area) may be set to allow and access to other areas may be prohibited. Even with such a configuration, game programs and non-games in the program / data area may be set. Since access to the area where the program is not stored is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control by malicious programs and malicious data.

Further, in the above, the configuration is such that the area itself that allows access in the program / data area is set, but by setting the area that prohibits access in the program / data area, the area that indirectly permits access is set. It may be configured to be performed.

The main control unit 41 determines that the user program is executed when the user program is executed in an area other than the designated area where the program running is permitted, that is, in normal operation, based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. When the user program is executed in a non-existing area, the IAT circuit 506a outputs an IAT generation signal to disable the progress of the game. Therefore, the unused area of the ROM 41b, the area unrelated to the operation, and the RAM 41c are not yet used. Even when an illegal program is stored in the used area or the like, it is possible to prevent the illegal program from being executed.

In particular, in this embodiment, the game program area and the non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, and the game program area is assigned to the front of the non-game program area behind the game program area. The unused area 1 is assigned to the area, and the IAT circuit 506a permits the program running for each of the game program area and the non-game program area in the program / data area based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. While it is set as a designated area, program running is prohibited in other areas, that is, in the program / data area where game programs and non-game programs are not stored, so it is not intended due to malicious programs or illegal data. It is possible to prevent control from being performed.

Further, in the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, the game area is allocated behind the non-game program area, and the unused area is in front of the game program area behind the non-game program area. Is assigned, and based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, the IAT circuit 506a sets each of the game program area and the non-game program area of the program / data area as designated areas for permitting program running. Therefore, even if the program running in other areas is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control due to an illegal program or illegal data.

A game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area, and an unused area 1 is allocated to an area behind the game program area and before the non-game program area, and an HW parameter area. A group of areas including the area from the start address of the game program area to the final address of the non-game program in the program / data area based on the parameters set in (the area from the game program area to the non-game data area). The IAT circuit 506a may be collectively set as a designated area for permitting program running, and program running in other areas may be prohibited. Even in such a configuration, the program / data area may be configured. Since the program running in the area where the game program and the non-game program are not stored is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control by the malicious program or the illegal data. Further, in the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, the game area is allocated behind the non-game program area, and the unused area is in front of the game program area behind the non-game program area. Is assigned, and based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, a group of areas (from the game program area) including the area from the start address of the non-game program area to the final address of the game program in the program / data area. Even if the IAT circuit 506a collectively sets the area up to the non-game data area as a designated area that allows program running and program running in other areas is prohibited, it is due to an illegal program or illegal data. It is possible to prevent unintended control from being performed.

Further, in the above, the area itself that allows the program running is set in the program / data area, but the program running is indirectly permitted by setting the area that prohibits the program running in the program / data area. The configuration may be such that an area is set.

The program executed by the main control unit 41 includes a main routine that manages the progress of the entire program and a subroutine that is called during the execution of another program.

Further, a CALL instruction is included as an instruction for causing the main control unit 41 to execute the program stored in the program / data area.

The CALL instruction is an instruction that calls and executes a subroutine stored at an address specified in the main routine or the subroutine. When calling a subroutine by a CALL instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the address of the caller in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored in the designated address. Then, after the subroutine is completed, the address of the caller stored in the stack area, that is, the program of the main routine or the subroutine of the caller who executed the CALL instruction is returned.

Further, the CALL instruction includes a normal CALL instruction and a CALLV instruction which is a special CALL instruction. The normal CALL instruction is an instruction that calls a subroutine by specifying both the upper address and the lower address and specifying the address by the specified upper address and the lower address, whereas the CALLV instruction specifies only the lower address. By doing so, it is an instruction to specify an address by a preset upper address and a specified lower address in the vector table area of the ROM 41b and call the subroutine, and call the subroutine with a smaller amount of data than a normal CALL instruction. It becomes possible.

The RST instruction is an instruction to call and execute a subroutine stored in a specific address corresponding to a specified value by designating a value corresponding to a plurality of predetermined specific addresses, and is an instruction to execute the above-mentioned ordinary CALL. It is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data than an instruction or a CALLV instruction. When the subroutine is called by the RST instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the address of the caller in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored in the specific address corresponding to the specified value. Then, after the subroutine is completed, the address of the caller stored in the stack area, that is, the main routine or subroutine of the caller who executed the RST instruction is returned.

A jump instruction is an instruction to move to a program stored at an address specified in a main routine or a subroutine. The main control unit 41 moves to the program stored at the address specified by the jump instruction, and executes the destination program. In this case, unlike the CALL instruction and the RST instruction, the program does not return to the source program even if the program after the transfer ends.

Further, the main control unit 41 includes an LD instruction as an instruction for reading the data stored in the program / data area. The LD instruction is an instruction to read the data stored at the address specified in the main routine or the subroutine into the specified register. The main control unit 41 reads the data stored at the address specified by the LD instruction, and stores the read data in the register specified by the LD instruction.

Of the game programs stored in the ROM 41b, the frequently used subroutines are stored in the game program area of the ROM 41b where the start address is a specific value (for example, 00H). On the other hand, in the vector table area of the ROM 41b, a specific value is set as the upper address of the subroutine called by the CALLV instruction. Then, when the main control unit 41 calls a subroutine in which the upper address of the start address is a specific value, the main control unit 41 uses the CALLV instruction to specify only the lower address, thereby setting the specific value set in the vector table area as the upper address. Specify, specify the lower address specified as the lower address, and call and execute the subroutine stored in the address that combines the upper and lower levels. For this reason, the upper addresses that form part of the addresses used when calling the subroutines that are used particularly frequently in the game program are set in advance as specific values in the vector table, and are based on the specific values set in the vector table. Since the address is specified, it is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data than a normal CALL instruction that calls a program by specifying both the upper address and the lower address, and when calling these subroutines. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address.

The subroutines that are particularly frequently used among the non-game programs stored in the ROM 41b are stored in the non-game program area of the ROM 41b where the start address is a specific value, and the CALLV instruction is given in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. By setting a specific value as the upper address of the subroutine to be called in, and when the main control unit 41 calls the subroutine in which the upper address of the start address is the specific value, these subroutines are specified by using the CALLV instruction to specify only the lower address. Even if the configuration is such that the program is called and executed, it is possible to call the subroutine with a smaller amount of data than the normal CALL instruction that calls the program by specifying both the upper address and the lower address, and these subroutines can be called. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling.

Further, the upper address used when calling by the CALLV instruction may be set to a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of the vector table area.

Further, not limited to the CALLV instruction, a part of the address is specified by using the value stored in the vector table area, the value set in the specific register, etc., and the subroutine is specified by specifying the remaining part of the address. If the configuration uses a special CALL instruction that enables the storage address of the subroutine to be specified, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling the subroutine. In addition, identification values with a smaller amount of data than the addresses are assigned to each of the multiple areas that make up the vector table area, and the storage addresses of the subroutines are set in each of these multiple areas, and the identification values are specified to identify them. Even in a configuration using a special CALL instruction that makes it possible to specify the storage address of the subroutine stored in the area corresponding to the value, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling the subroutine. ..

Further, the game data that is particularly frequently used among the game data stored in the ROM 41b is stored in the area where the start address is a specific value in the game data area of the ROM 41b, and a special LD is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. By setting a specific value as the upper address of the data to be read by the command, and when the main control unit 41 calls the game data in which the upper address of the start address is the specific value, only the lower address is specified by using a special LD command. , Even if the configuration is such that these game data are read, it is possible to call the game data with a smaller amount of data as compared with the normal LD instruction that reads data by specifying both the upper address and the lower address. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when reading the game data of.

In addition, the non-game data that is particularly frequently used among the non-game data stored in the ROM 41b is stored in the non-game data area of the ROM 41b where the start address is a specific value, and is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. When a specific value is set as the upper address of the data to be read by the special LD instruction and the main control unit 41 calls the non-game data in which the upper address of the start address is the specific value, only the lower address is used by the special LD instruction. By specifying, even if the configuration is such that these non-game data are read, the non-game data is called with a smaller amount of data than the normal LD instruction that reads data by specifying both the upper address and the lower address. This makes it possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying an address when reading these non-game data.

Further, even in these cases, the upper address used when calling with a special LD instruction may be set to a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of the vector table area.

In addition, a part of the address is specified using the value stored in the vector table area, the value set in a specific register, etc., and the data storage address can be specified by specifying the remaining part of the address. If the configuration uses the special LD instruction, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when reading the data. In addition, identification values that are smaller than the address are assigned to each of the multiple areas that make up the vector table area, data storage addresses are set for each of these multiple areas, and identification values are specified. Even in a configuration using a special LD instruction that makes it possible to specify the storage address of the data stored in the area corresponding to the value, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when reading the data. ..

The main control unit 41 is activated when a system reset by inputting a system reset signal, a WDT reset by WDT506b, and the above-mentioned illegal access reset occur. At this time, the value set in the vector table area, that is, The upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt process (main) are values indicating the area in which the program or the like is actually stored in the program area, or FFFFH (in an unused vector table area). It is determined whether it is a value to be set), and if the value set in the vector table area is neither a value indicating outside the area in which the program is set nor FFFFH, it is not started. It is possible to prevent in advance that an unintended process is executed due to an interruption or the like.

The game program is a program related to the progress of the game, and is a program for executing a process that hinders the progress of the game unless the process based on the program is executed. On the other hand, the non-game program is a program that is not related to the progress of the game, and even if it is called from the game program and returns to the game program without executing the process based on the program, the game can be progressed. It is a program for executing processing.

As shown in FIG. 8, the game program includes a game-dedicated program included only in the game program, and a common determination program and a common general-purpose program included in both the game program and the non-game program.

The game-dedicated program includes, for example, a game start waiting process, an internal lottery process, a reel control process, a game end setting process, an external output 1 process, an initial setting process, a power interruption process, an abnormal winning determination process, and an error process. In the game start waiting process, after the control of one game is completed, the number of bets is set by inserting medals, etc., and after the specified number of bets is set, the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. The internal lottery process is a process of performing an internal lottery and setting a winning flag, etc., and the reel control process is a process of starting the rotation of the reel and operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. This is a process for stopping the reel with, and the game end setting process determines whether or not a prize has been generated according to the stop position of the stopped reel, and pays out medals, sets the re-game, and sets the game state. The external output 1 process is a process for performing output control of the medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, and RT signal among the external output signals. , The initial setting process is a process for making the game possible when the power is turned on (checking for backup abnormality, initializing the register, etc.), and the power failure process is the state before the power failure after the power failure occurs. It is a process for making it possible to return, the abnormal winning judgment processing is a processing for determining whether or not an abnormal winning is generated in which an unacceptable combination is won, and the error processing is a processing for various abnormalities (medals). Insertion abnormality, foreign matter detection in medal selector 29, reel rotation abnormality, medal payout abnormality, foreign matter detection near payout exit, RAM abnormality, set value abnormality, empty hopper tank 34a, full tank detection of overflow tank 35, abnormality This is a process for disabling the game when a winning prize, etc.) is detected. Further, although not particularly shown, the game program also includes the above-mentioned processing related to AT (control related to lottery related to AT, control related to navigation notification, etc.).

The common determination program in the game program includes, for example, input determination processing and payout determination processing. The insertion determination process is a process of determining whether or not the medal has passed normally by the insertion medal sensor 31, and is a process executed in a state where medals can be inserted for setting the number of bets and the like. The payout determination process is a process of determining whether or not the medal has passed normally by the payout sensor 34c, and is a process executed in a state where the medal payout is permitted at the time of winning a small winning combination or at the time of credit settlement. Is.

The common general-purpose program in the game program is a process called and executed from a plurality of types of processes constituting the game program. For example, counter update process, port input process, data conversion process, LED display process, data setting process, etc. Includes command setting processing. The counter update process is a process for updating the specified counter value, the port input process is a process for acquiring the input state of the specified port, and the data conversion process is input using game data. It is a process of converting and outputting the data, the LED display process is a process of setting to display the specified value on the LED, and the data setting process is a process of setting the specified data. The command setting process is a process of setting a specified command in the command queue.

In particular, when an abnormality is detected as described above, the game program resets the setting value according to the type of abnormality (random number abnormality, RAM abnormality, backup abnormality, setting value abnormality, and resets it. In the case of an abnormality other than the above, it includes error processing that disables the progress of the game until the reset operation) is established.

As shown in FIG. 8, the non-game program includes a non-game dedicated program included only in the non-game program, and the same common determination program and common general-purpose program as the game program.

The non-game dedicated program includes, for example, test signal output processing, foreign matter detection processing, door monitoring processing, external output 2 processing, input medal error judgment processing, payout medal error judgment processing, power failure judgment processing, normal command transmission processing, and power failure. Includes time command transmission processing. The test signal output process is a process for outputting a test signal generated in connection with the result of the game, and the foreign matter detection process is a process for detecting a foreign matter in the medal passage by the slot sensor 26. The door monitoring process is a process for detecting the opening of the front door 1b, and the external output 2 process is a security signal (door opening signal, setting change signal, closing error signal, payout error signal) among the external output signals. This is a process for controlling the output, and the inserted medal error determination process detects the backflow of the inserted medal, the medal clogging detection in the medal selector 29, and the foreign matter detection in the medal selector 29 based on the detection status of the inserted medal sensor 31. The payout medal error determination process is a process for performing backflow detection of payout medals, medal clogging detection near the payout exit, and foreign matter detection near the payout exit based on the detection status of the payout sensor 34c. The power failure determination process is a process for determining whether or not a voltage drop signal from the power failure detection circuit 48 is detected, and the normal command transmission process is a command setting for a game-dedicated program and a non-game-dedicated program. This is a process for transmitting the first command set in the command queue by the process to the sub-control unit 91, and the command transmission process at the time of power failure is set in the command queue. This is a process for transmitting all the existing commands to the sub-control unit 91.

The common general-purpose program in the non-game program is a process called and executed from a plurality of types of processes constituting the non-game program, and like the common general-purpose program in the game program, for example, counter update process, port input process, and so on. Includes data conversion processing, LED display processing, data setting processing, and command setting processing.

The non-game program includes a process of determining whether or not the detection status is a predetermined detection status based on the detection status of the detection means (input port sensor 26, full tank sensor 35a, door open detection switch 25) not related to the progress of the game.

In addition, the non-game program functions as a detection means related to the progress of the game in a specific control state among a plurality of control states (game start waiting process, internal lottery process, reel control process, game end setting process). In other control states, the detection means (for example, the insertion medal sensor 31 and the payout sensor 34c) that functions as the detection means that is not related to the progress of the game is based on the detection status in the control state that is not related to the progress of the game. Processing for determining whether or not the detection status is predetermined (for example, detection processing for inserted medals and detection processing for paid medals for detecting an abnormality caused by detection of insertion of medals during reel rotation or withdrawal of medals) Including. It should be noted that such a determination process corresponds to a common determination program because it is the same process as the process of determining whether or not the detection status is a predetermined detection status based on the detection status in the control state related to the progress of the game in the game program. ..

Among the processes included in the game program, the number of medals to be paid out in the external output 1 process, the process of counting the number of medals inserted in the game start waiting process, the process of switching the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the process of setting at the end of the game. Processing that counts, processing that detects that the hopper tank 34a is empty, processing that updates software random numbers, processing related to AT, processing that sends internal winning commands, etc. that are not directly related to the progress of the game If so, all or part of these processes may be included in the non-game program. On the other hand, if the processes included in the non-game program are indirectly related to the progress of the game, all or part of these processes may be included in the game program.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 calls the non-game program in the process based on the game program to execute the process based on the non-game program, and after the process based on the non-game program is completed. , Return to the process based on the game program.

As shown in FIG. 9, in principle, when executing the process based on the game program, the CPU 41a executes the process based on the game program with reference to the game data in the game data area, and uses the game RAM area as a work. , It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the game RAM area. Further, in principle, when executing the process based on the non-game program, the CPU 41a executes the process based on the non-game program with reference to the game data in the non-game data area, and uses the non-game RAM area as a work. It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the non-gaming RAM area.

Further, the CPU 41a does not refer to the non-game data area and does not update the non-game RAM area when executing the process based on the game program, but it is possible to refer to the non-game RAM area. , In executing the process based on the non-game program, the game data area is not referred to and the game RAM area is not updated, but the game RAM area can be referred to.

Further, the processing based on the game program can refer only to a specific area required for the game program (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection) in the non-game RAM area, and can be referred to the non-game program. In the processing based on the game RAM area, only a specific area necessary for the non-game program (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a game state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.) can be referred to. In addition, a specific area of the non-game RAM area to which processing based on the game program can be referred to, and a specific area of the game RAM area to which processing based on the non-game program can be referred to may be allocated to continuous address areas. Although it is preferable, the configuration may be such that a part or all of the address area is not contiguous.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game program area in which the game program related to the progress of the game is stored, the game data area in which the game data referred to by the game program is readable, and the work data referred to by the game program are stored. A game RAM area that is readable and writable, a non-game program area that is a program called by the game program and stores non-game programs that are not related to the progress of the game, and a non-game that the non-game program refers to. Since the non-game data area in which the data is readable and stored and the non-game RAM area in which the work data referred to by the non-game program is readable and writable are allocated separately, the game program, The game data and the work data of the game program and the non-game program, the non-game data, and the work data of the non-game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

Further, by separating the game program area and the game data area and the non-game program area and the non-game data area, the area occupied by the ROM 41b can be compactly managed according to each function. It will be easier to identify the relevant data.

Further, in the present embodiment, the non-game RAM area can be referred to when the game program is executed, and the game RAM area can be referred to when the non-game program is executed. The data used by the non-game program can be easily used when executing the game program, and the data used by the game program can be easily used when executing the non-game program. On the other hand, it is impossible to update the non-game RAM area when executing the game program, and it is impossible to update the game RAM area when executing the non-game program. Does not affect the processing of the non-game program, and the non-game program does not affect the processing of the game program.

Further, in the present embodiment, the processing based on the game program can refer only to a specific area (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection) required for the game program in the non-game RAM area. , The processing based on the non-game program can refer only to a specific area (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a game state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.) necessary for the non-game program in the game RAM area. Therefore, since the data that the game program can refer to in the non-game RAM area and the data that the non-game program can refer to are limited to a specific area, the reference destination of the game program or the non-game program can be easily specified. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 10A, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment can call a non-game program from a process based on the game program during execution of the main process, and FIG. 10B shows. As shown, it is possible to call a non-game program from a process based on the game program during execution of the timer interrupt process.

As shown in FIG. 10A, when a non-game program is called from the main process based on the game program, the game program sets the start address of the non-game program to be called in a specific area and performs a common call process. Execute 1. The common call process 1 is a process included in the game program. In the common call process 1, the register of the game program is saved in the game stack area, and the stack pointer (SP, the address indicating the current position of the game stack area). Is saved in the SP save area of the game RAM area, and then the timer interrupt is set to prohibit by setting the value of the interrupt master permission flag to a value indicating interrupt prohibition, and then set to a specific area. Call the non-game program at the address you are using.

On the other hand, the stack pointer (non-SP, address indicating the current position of the non-game stack area) of the non-game program is set based on the called non-game program, and the processing of the non-game program is executed. After that, it returns to the calling game program, that is, the common call processing 1.

After returning to the common call process 1, the common call process 1 releases the prohibition of timer interrupt by setting the value of the interrupt master permission flag to a value indicating interrupt permission, and saves the game stack area and SP. Based on the data saved in the area, the register and the stack pointer of the game program are returned to the state before calling the non-game program, and the process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game program calls the non-game program, the interrupt is set to be prohibited by the common call process 1, and when the non-game program returns to the game program, the interrupt is performed. Since the prohibition is lifted, the interruption can be set to be prohibited for the period during which the non-game program is being executed.

When the non-game program is called from the main process based on the game program, the non-game program first sets interrupts to be prohibited, executes various processes, and ends the non-game program. The prohibition of interrupts may be lifted, and with such a configuration, interrupts can be set to be prohibited during the period in which the non-game program is being executed, as in the present embodiment. Further, since the non-game program sets the prohibition and cancellation of interrupts, it is not necessary to set and cancel the prohibition of interrupts in the common call process 1 of the game program, and the capacity of the game program can be reduced. ..

As shown in FIG. 10B, when calling a non-game program from a timer interrupt process based on a game program, the game program sets the start address of the non-game program to be called in a specific area and is common. The call process 2 is executed. In the common call processing 2, the register of the game program is saved in the game stack area, and the stack pointer (SP, the address indicating the current position of the game stack area) is saved in the SP save area of the game RAM area, and then specified. Call the non-game program of the address set in the area of.

On the other hand, the called non-game program sets the stack pointer of the non-game program, executes the processing of the non-game program, and then returns to the common call processing 2 of the caller.

After returning to the common call process 2, the common call process 2 sets the stack pointer of the register and the game program to the state before calling the non-game program based on the data saved in the game stack area and the SP save area. Return and finish.

As described above, unlike the call common process 1, the common call process 2 does not set and cancel the timer interrupt as prohibited, but as described above, the main control unit 41 performs other interrupts during the execution of the timer interrupt process. Since the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited, the interrupt can be prohibited for the period during which the non-game program is executed.

In this embodiment, when the game program executes the common call process 1 and the common call process 2 to call the non-game program and execute the non-game program, the register actually used by the game program is used. Since the process of saving and protecting all the areas of the register is performed regardless of the presence or absence, when returning to the game program, it is possible to surely return from the state at the time when the non-game program was called. ..

The non-game program protects the value of the register used by the game program immediately before calling the non-game program from the process based on the game program in the game program without executing the common call process 1 and the common call process 2. After all the processing based on the above is completed, the value of the register protected at the first stage of returning to the game program may be restored. With such a configuration, the register may be restored before the non-game program is called. Since the protection process is performed and the register is restored after returning from the non-game program, the data stored in the register by the non-game program does not affect the game program.

Further, when the non-game program is called, the non-game program first saves the stack pointer and the register of the game program, and the stack pointer and the register of the game program are restored at the end of the non-game program. Also, with such a configuration, when returning to the game program, it is possible to surely return from the state at the time when the non-game program was called, and also to return to the game program. The capacity can be reduced.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can mainly execute a timer interrupt process (main) that interrupts and executes the main process at regular intervals (intervals of about 0.56 ms). The timer interrupt process (main) is a process executed by an interrupt generated according to the count of the timer circuit 509, and the address in which the timer interrupt process (main) program is stored is a vector table. It is set as a value corresponding to the timer interrupt of. Then, when the timer interrupt occurs, the process from the address is executed. In addition, other interrupts are automatically prohibited during the execution period of the timer interrupt process (main).

In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process (main) is included in the game program, while the power failure determination process, the power interruption command transmission process, and the normal command transmission process executed in the timer interrupt process (main). The door monitoring process is included in the non-game program, and the main control unit 41 sets interrupt prohibition in the timer interrupt process (main), saves the stack pointer and the register of the game program, and then these. It is designed to call the non-game program of. Further, when the timer interrupt processing (main) is returned from these non-game programs, the stack pointer and the register of the game program are returned to the state before the non-game program is called, and then the subsequent processing is performed. It is supposed to run. Since the main control unit 41 is set to prohibit other interrupts during the execution of the interrupt process, the main control unit 41 executes the subsequent process in the interrupt prohibited state even after returning from the non-game program. To do.

In addition, the non-game programs executed in the timer interrupt process (main), such as power failure determination process, power failure command transmission process, normal command transmission process, and door monitoring process, need to be executed before these non-game programs. Processing other than certain processing (for example, port input processing that needs to be executed before branching of the timer interrupt, motor phase signal output processing), that is, whether it is performed before or after the non-game program has a control effect. It is designed to be executed before no processing.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game, and is capable of executing the game. In addition to executing the main process based on the program, it is possible to interrupt the main process at predetermined time intervals and execute the timer interrupt process (main) based on the game program, and the timer interrupt process can also be executed from the main process. It is also possible to call and execute a non-game program from (main).

In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may malfunction due to the timer interrupt processing (main) being executed while the non-game program is being executed.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. It is possible to execute the main process based on the game program, and it is also possible to interrupt the main process at predetermined time intervals and execute the timer interrupt process (main) based on the game program, and also from the main process. , In a configuration in which the non-game program can be called and executed from the timer interrupt process (main), when the non-game program is called from the main process, after setting the interruption of other processes to prohibit, the relevant processing is performed. While calling the non-game program, when calling the non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main), that is, when calling the non-game program in a situation where further interruption is unlikely to occur, interrupt other processes. Since the non-game program is called without being set to prohibit, it is possible to reduce the program capacity related to the prohibition of interruption while preventing malfunction due to execution of interruption during execution of the non-game program. ..

The timer interrupt processing (main) executed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment includes processing by a game program, for example, LED dynamic display processing, control signal output processing, etc., and processing by a non-game program, for example, normal time. It is composed of a plurality of processes including a command transmission process and a command transmission process at the time of power failure, and among a plurality of processes constituting the timer interrupt process (main), a process by a predetermined game program. In particular, since the non-game program is called before the process that can be executed before or after these non-game programs, that is, a plurality of processes constituting the timer interrupt process (main). Since the non-game program is called at the earliest possible stage, for example, even if the timer interrupt process (main) is not completed for some reason and the next timer interrupt occurs and double interrupts occur. , It is possible to prevent other interrupts from being executed during the execution of a non-game program.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can execute the game program and the non-game program, and has a game stack area for saving data used by the game program and a non-game stack area for saving data used by the non-game program. , Is provided separately, and the main control unit 41 saves the data used by the game program and the data used by the non-game program in the stack area separately provided, so that the stack area Is easy to manage. In particular, the data used by the game program saved due to the occurrence of the timer interrupt and the data used by the non-game program performed during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) are mixed and stored in one stack area. Since there is no such thing, stack management is not complicated.

When executing the non-game program, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment saves the register value used in the game program to the game stack area, calls the non-game program, and performs processing in the non-game program. When the processing in the non-game program is completed, the saved register value is restored, so that the register value used by the game program is prevented from being changed as the non-game program is executed. it can.

Further, when calling a non-game program from a process based on the game program, the call common process 1 or the call common process 2 for saving the value of the register used in the game program to the game stack area is called, and the main By standardizing the program for executing the non-game program in the process, the program capacity can be reduced.

In this embodiment, when the non-game program is called from the process based on the game program in the main process, the call common process 1 is executed, while the non-game program is called from the process based on the game program in the timer interrupt process. At this time, the call common process 2 different from the call common process 1 is executed to save the value of the register used in the game program to the game stack area. However, the main process is based on the game program. A common call common process may be executed both when the non-game program is called from and when the non-game program is called from the process based on the game program in the timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-game program can be called and executed from both the main process and the timer interrupt process (main), and the non-game program can be executed from the main process. When calling, interrupt of other processing is set to prohibit and the non-game program is called, while when calling the non-game program from the timer interrupt processing (main), interrupt of other processing is set to prohibit. Although it is configured to call the non-game program without doing so, the main control unit 41 may call the non-game program from the main process or the non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main). It may be configured to prohibit interruption of the processing of.

In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 prohibits interruption of other processes not only when the non-game program is called from the main process but also when the non-game program is called from the timer interrupt process (main). Therefore, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent a malfunction due to the interruption being executed during the execution of the non-game program.

In particular, when the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, the interrupt prohibition is set, and the interrupt prohibition is canceled at the end of the timer interrupt process (main), so that the timer interrupt process (main) Interruption of other processing is prohibited during execution, but even in this case, interrupting of other processing is prohibited again when calling a non-game program from the timer interrupt processing (main), so something Even if the interrupt prohibition setting is canceled due to the cause, it is possible to prevent a malfunction due to the interrupt being executed during the execution of the non-game program.

Further, as described above, the interrupt prohibition is set when the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, and the interrupt prohibition is released at the end of the timer interrupt process (main). The configuration is such that interrupts of other processes are prohibited during execution of (main), but when interrupting other processes is prohibited again when calling a non-game program from timer interrupt processes (main). By maintaining the setting for prohibiting interrupts of other processes set when the non-game program is called even after the non-game program ends, the non-game interrupt process (main) is being executed. It is possible to prevent the prohibition of interrupts from being lifted by executing the program.

Next, the initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment initializes the game RAM area, the unused area 4, and the non-game RAM area when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed at the start of the setting change process. That is, initialization 0 is performed to initialize all the usable areas.

Further, when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are not destroyed at the start of the setting change process, the area of the game RAM area excluding the special work, the unused area 4, and the non-game RAM area are initialized. That is, initialization 1 is performed to initialize an area other than the special work among the usable areas.

Further, at the end of the setting change process, the important work, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area are initialized, that is, the special work and the game stack area in the game RAM area. Perform initialization 2 to initialize areas other than (in use).

Further, at the end of a specific game state and at the end of one game, initialization 3 is performed to initialize the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area.

Further, at the end of one game, which is not the end of a specific game state, the initialization 4 for initializing the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area is performed.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs initialization 0 to 4 when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the first condition is satisfied as the predetermined condition, of the usable area of the RAM 41c. When at least a part of the game RAM area in which the data used by the game program is stored is initialized and the second condition is satisfied as a predetermined condition, at least a part of the game RAM area and the usable area of the RAM 41c Initialize at least a part of the non-gaming RAM area used by the non-gaming program.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, as the first condition, at the end of one game, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused), which are a part of the game RAM area among the usable areas. Is initialized, but the non-gaming RAM area of the usable area is not initialized. Further, as the first condition, at the end of the specific game state, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused), which are a part of the game RAM area, are initialized, but are used. Of the possible areas, the non-gaming RAM area is not initialized. Further, as the first condition, after the setting change state is completed, the important work, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused), which are a part of the game RAM area, are initialized. However, the non-gaming RAM area of the usable area is not initialized.

On the other hand, as a second condition, if there is no abnormality in the RAM when the setting change state is started, the important work, the general work, the unused area 3, which is a part of the game RAM area among the usable areas, The game stack area (unused) and the game stack area (used) are initialized, and all areas of the non-game RAM area are initialized. If there is an abnormality in the RAM when the setting change state is started, all the areas of the game RAM area among the usable areas are initialized, and all the areas of the game RAM area are initialized.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game, and can execute the game program and the non-game. A ROM 41b for storing a program is provided.

In such a configuration, if a game program and a non-game program are mixed in one ROM 41b, it is difficult to determine which program is the program related to the progress of the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which the game program is stored and a non-game program area in which the non-game program is stored, and the game program area and the non-game program. Since the area and the area are assigned separately, the game program and the non-game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

Further, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment is used as a work of a game program and stores a game RAM area for storing data used by the game program, and a game RAM area used as a work of a non-game program and stores data used by the non-game program. A non-game RAM area and a RAM 41c including the non-game RAM area are provided, and since the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are separately allocated in the RAM 41c, the data used by the game program and the data used by the non-game program are used. The data can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area, and the main control unit 41 initializes at least a part of the game RAM area when the first initialization condition is satisfied, and the first When the initialization condition of 2 is satisfied, at least a part of the game RAM area is initialized, and at least a part of the non-game RAM area is initialized, so that the data used by the game program stored in the RAM 41c Of the data used by the non-game program, appropriate data can be initialized according to the situation.

As the first initialization condition, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment initializes the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused), which are a part of the game RAM area, when one game is completed. As the first initialization condition, when the special game state (BB) is finished and one game is finished, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack, which are a part of the game RAM area, are finished. When the area (unused) is initialized and the setting change is completed and the main process is started as the first initialization condition, the important work area, the general work area, and the unused area that are a part of the game RAM area are not used. Since the used area 3 and the game stack area (unused) are initialized, appropriate data can be initialized according to the situation.

Further, as a second initialization condition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has an important work, a general work, and an unused area which are a part of the game RAM area when there is no abnormality in the RAM at the start of setting change. 3. Initialize the game stack area (unused) and the game stack area (in use), and of the non-game RAM areas, the area referenced by the game program, the area not referenced by the game program, and the non-game stack area ( (Unused) and non-game stack area (in use), that is, all areas of the non-game RAM area are initialized, and as a second initialization condition, when there is an abnormality in the RAM at the start of setting change, the game RAM area Of these, special work, important work, general work, unused area 3, game stack area (unused) and game stack area (in use), that is, all areas of the game RAM area are initialized, and the non-game RAM area is initialized. Of these, to initialize all areas of the area referenced by the game program, the area not referenced by the game program, the non-game stack area (unused) and the non-game stack area (in use), that is, the non-game RAM area. , Data used by the gaming program stored in the RAM 41c and data used by the non-gaming program, which are appropriate depending on the situation can be initialized.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment has a configuration in which a part of the game RAM area is initialized when the first initialization condition is satisfied, but the main control unit 41 is the first. When the initialization condition is satisfied, at least a part of the game RAM area may be initialized, and all the areas of the game RAM area may be initialized.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to initialize a part of the game RAM area and all areas of the non-game RAM area when the second initialization condition is satisfied. However, the main control unit 41 initializes at least a part of the game RAM area and initializes at least a part of the non-game RAM area when the second initialization condition is satisfied. Any area may be used, and all areas of the game RAM area may be initialized, all areas of the non-game RAM area may be initialized, or at least a part of the non-game RAM area may be initialized. It may be the one that initializes all the areas of both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area.

Since the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment configures the program for initializing the game RAM area and the program for initializing the non-game RAM area as separate programs, the game program is a non-game RAM area. Since there is no need to initialize, the capacity of the game program can be reduced. Further, the program for initializing the game RAM area can be shared both when the first initialization condition is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied. Further, a program for initializing the game RAM area is provided as a game program, and a program for initializing the non-game RAM area is provided as a non-game program. Therefore, the game program initializes the non-game RAM area, or the non-game program performs the game RAM. It is possible to prevent the game program from affecting the non-game program and the non-game program from affecting the game program without initializing the area.

As the first initialization condition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the game end processing setting in the main processing, and then determines that it is not the end of a specific game state, that is, the end of one game. By setting the start address of the RAM to be initialized at the end of the game and executing the game area initialization process, a predetermined area of the game RAM area is initialized, so that the game progresses for each game unit. A part of the unnecessary game RAM area can be initialized.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is activated with the setting key switch 37 turned on, and when the setting change process is started, that is, the second initialization condition is satisfied based on the setting change operation being performed. At that time, the game area initialization process is executed to initialize a predetermined area of the game RAM area, and the non-game area initialization process is executed to initialize the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area. It is possible to initialize both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area based on the setting change operation (initialization operation) of the game clerk.

The game RAM area of the RAM 41c of the present embodiment includes an unused area 3 that is not used when performing control based on the game program or when performing control based on the non-game program, and includes the first initialization condition. Since the unused area 3 is initialized both when the above is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent invalid data from being stored in the unused area 3.

In this embodiment, the unused area 3 is initialized both when the first initialization condition is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied, but at least when the first initialization condition is satisfied. If the unused area 3 is initialized when any one of the conditions is satisfied when the second initialization condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent invalid data from being stored in the unused area 3. Further, if the first initialization condition is a configuration including a plurality of conditions, and if the configuration is such that the unused area 3 is initialized when at least one of the conditions is satisfied, invalid data is stored in the unused area 3. It can be prevented from being done. The same applies even if the second initialization condition includes a plurality of conditions.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is used as a work of a game program and is used as a game RAM area for storing data used by the game program, and a non-game RAM area is used as a work of a non-game program and stores data used by the non-game program. A RAM 41c including a game RAM area is provided, and the RAM 41c has a configuration capable of holding data stored in the RAM 41c for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped by the backup power supply, and is a main. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the control unit 41 starts the initial setting process, and whether or not the stored contents of the RAM are normal based on the data stored in the RAM 41c held by the backup power supply. If it is determined to be normal, the control is restarted based on the data stored in the RAM 41c.

In such a configuration, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, whether or not the stored contents of the RAM are normal based on the data stored in both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. When determining whether or not, the load when resuming control based on the data stored in the RAM 41c becomes excessive.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment starts the initial setting process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 starts, and the RAM of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c held by the backup power supply It is determined whether or not the stored contents of the RAM are normal based on the parity and the destruction diagnosis data stored in the game RAM area, and if it is determined to be normal, the data stored in the game RAM area and the non-game Control is restarted based on the data stored in the RAM area, and whether or not the non-game data stored in the non-game RAM area that does not hinder the progress of the game is normal or not. By omitting the determination, it is possible to reduce the load when resuming the control while ensuring that the game can proceed normally.

The game RAM area of the RAM 41c of the present embodiment includes an unused area 3 that is not used both when performing control based on the game program and when performing control based on the non-game program, and includes the main control. The unit 41 executes the initial setting process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, calculates the RAM parity of the game RAM area including the unused area 3 in the initial setting process, and calculates the RAM. Since it is determined whether or not the stored contents of the game RAM area are normal based on the parity, it is possible to prevent illegal data from being stored in the unused area 3.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the initial setting process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and determines whether or not the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed in the initial setting process. , When it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed, the RAM error flag is set to control the error processing, and then the error state is maintained without automatically recovering, while the setting key switch 36 When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started while is ON, the setting change process is controlled, the game area initialization process is executed to initialize the game RAM area, and the non-game area is initialized. Since the process is executed to initialize the non-game RAM area, that is, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are initialized when the error state is cleared, either the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area It is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with an abnormality occurring in the crab.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment sets a RAM abnormality flag when it is determined in the initial setting process that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. After that, with the setting key switch 36 turned on, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and the setting change process is executed, so that the game is played as the error state is cleared. Although both the RAM area and the non-gaming RAM area are initialized, the main control unit 41 destroys the stored contents of the RAM 41c in the initial setting process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. When it is determined that the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are both initialized, the error processing may be controlled. In such a configuration, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are initialized when the error processing is controlled. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, either the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area is abnormal. It is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with the occurrence of. Further, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area may be initialized both when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed and when the setting change process is subsequently executed. Even with the configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with an abnormality occurring in either the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment executes the power interruption process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power supply voltage drop is detected by the power interruption detection circuit 48. In the power interruption processing, the RAM 41c By prohibiting access to, access to both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area is prohibited, so the non-game RAM area that is not subject to judgment as to whether or not the data is destroyed at the next startup is used. This can prevent unauthorized data from being stored.

Next, the main control unit 41 detects an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game (for example, an abnormality caused by detecting the insertion or withdrawal of medals during reel rotation, or an abnormality due to the detection of insertion of medals during the payout process). The control when the security signal is output when the abnormality) is detected will be described with reference to FIG.

Insertion errors during reel control processing and payout processing can occur, for example, when foreign matter is inserted from the medal insertion slot 4, foreign matter is present in the medal flow path, or during reel control processing and payout processing. Regardless of this, it is detected when a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4 flows down to the hopper tank 34a side. Further, a payout error during the reel control process is detected when a medal is paid out when it is not the payout timing.

In FIG. 12A, the start operation, reel rotation start, first stop, second stop, third stop, and payout indicate each timing during the game. Specifically, the start operation indicates the timing at which the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. The reel rotation start indicates the timing at which the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating. The first stop indicates the timing at which the first stop operation performed while all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are still rotating is detected. The second stop indicates a state in which the rotation of any one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R has already stopped and the two reels are rotating, that is, the timing at which the second stop operation is detected. The third stop indicates a state in which the rotation of the two reels has already stopped and one reel is rotating, that is, the timing at which the third stop operation is detected. The payout indicates the timing at which the medal payout process is being performed.

The abnormality detection indicates the timing at which an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game is detected. The medal payout detection indicates the timing at which the paid out medal is detected by the payout sensor 34c. The medal OUT signal is a signal indicating that one medal has been paid out by outputting one pulse. The security signal indicates the output status of a signal (for example, an input error signal or a payout error signal) indicating that an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game has occurred.

FIG. 12A shows a medal payout detection, a medal OUT signal, and a security signal output when an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game is detected during the reel control process and a medal payout prize is generated. It is a figure which showed the timing. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, when an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game is detected during the reel control process, the security signal is not output immediately after the abnormality is detected, but after the payout process is completed. And, the security signal is output before the output of the medal OUT signal is completed. As a result, it is possible to recognize the medals paid out in the situation where an abnormality occurs during the reel control process. That is, it is possible to recognize the game value given in the situation where the abnormality occurs.

Further, as is conventionally known, when an abnormality is detected during a game and an abnormality is notified after the game is completed, when an abnormality signal is output after the processing related to the game is completed, it is described as "abnormality during the game". "Abnormality immediately after the end of the game" cannot be distinguished. However, in this embodiment, when an abnormality is detected at a predetermined timing within the period from the start of the game to the end of the application of the game medium, the output of the medal OUT signal is output after the application of the game medium is completed. Start outputting security signals before completion. As a result, for example, a hall computer of a game store analyzes the output timings of the medal OUT signal and the security signal collected by the collection unit, and the security signal is output before the output of the medal OUT signal is completed. By detecting, it is possible to distinguish that it is not an "abnormality immediately after the game" but an "abnormality during the game".

In FIG. 12A, the medal OUT signal is output after the payout process is completed. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 12B, the medal OUT is detected every time the medal payout is detected. A signal may be output. Even in such a case, if the output of the security signal is started before the output of the medal OUT signal is completed, for example, the output of the medal OUT signal corresponding to the detection of the last medal payout is detected. The output of the security signal may be started at the timing.

Next, the control content of the timer counter update process executed by the main control unit 41 will be described. In this embodiment, the value of the timer counter assigned to the RAM 41c is periodically updated, and the passage of time is specified by becoming a specific value (0). Conventionally, when measuring multiple types of time intervals, timer values are set and updated within multiple types of processing that require timekeeping, and each process is a program for updating multiple types of timer values. Since it is necessary to provide it inside, it has been a factor of increasing the program capacity. In addition, since multiple types of timer counters are assigned as data groups for each process used, it is necessary to read the values of their unrelated addresses in order to update them collectively in one process. there were.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, an area in which a plurality of types of timer counter values are stored is set in an area in which consecutive addresses are assigned according to a predetermined rule of the RAM 41c, and the timer values stored in the specified address are set. Since the update process is repeatedly executed while changing the specified address for the area where multiple types of timer counter values are stored by adding a constant to the current specified address, so that multiple types of timer values are updated. , The program capacity can be reduced as compared with the case where a process of designating a plurality of types of addresses and updating the value of the address is performed in each process.

It should be noted that the process of updating the timer value stored in the specified address is repeatedly executed while changing the specified address for the area in which the timer counter values of multiple types are stored by performing a predetermined operation, thereby performing multiple types of timers. Any configuration may be used as long as the value is updated. For example, by adding a constant to the currently specified address, multiple types of timer counter values can be repeatedly executed while changing the specified address for the area where the value is stored. The timer value may be updated, or a value corresponding to the number of processes with respect to the reference address (for example, in the case of a 1-byte counter, +1 for the number of processes 1 and +2 for the number of processes 2). In the case of 3, +3 ...) may be added or subtracted to update the plurality of types of timer values by repeatedly executing while changing the designated address for the area in which the plurality of types of timer counter values are stored.

Further, only a part of the timer counters provided in the main control unit 41 is set to the area to which continuous addresses are assigned according to a predetermined rule of the RAM 41c, and the timer value stored in the designated address is updated. A configuration may be used in which a plurality of types of timer values are updated by repeatedly executing the operation while changing the designated address for the area in which the plurality of types of timer values are stored by performing a predetermined operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, a separate timer counter is provided for each type of measurement period, but for example, one timer counter may be shared for a plurality of types of periods in which the measurement periods do not overlap.

Further, in this embodiment, as the processes executed by the main control unit 41, a timer interrupt process (main) that periodically performs a predetermined process regardless of the progress status of the game, and a timer interrupt process (main) that periodically performs the process according to the progress status of the game. The main control unit 41 sets an initial value in the timer counter when a timing condition is satisfied in the main process, including a main process that performs different processes in stages, and a plurality of types in the timer interrupt process (main). Since the timer value is updated and it is not necessary to provide a process for updating multiple types of timer values in each process constituting the main process, the program capacity for updating multiple types of timer values is reduced. be able to.

In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed by interrupting the main process periodically, but it is determined in advance in the timer interrupt process that is periodically performed regardless of the progress of the game. A configuration may be configured in which both the periodic processing for performing the processing and the main processing for performing different processing stepwise according to the progress of the game are performed. Even in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 is the main. By setting the initial value in the timer counter when the timing condition is satisfied in the process and updating multiple types of timer values in the periodic process, multiple types of timer values can be set in each process that constitutes the main process. Since it is not necessary to provide a process for updating, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for updating a plurality of types of timer values.

Further, in this embodiment, in the time counter update process, the value of the specified address is updated on the condition that the value of the specified address is not 0, and the timer value is updated to an abnormal value. Can be prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the time counter update process, the same number of processes as the number of timer counters to be updated is set, and the process of updating the timer value is repeatedly executed for the set number of processes. In addition to facilitating the management of the number of timer counters to be updated, for example, when a plurality of types of timer counters having different update intervals are provided, the type of timer value to be updated can be arbitrarily set according to the number of processes to be set. it can.

The number of processes, that is, the number of timer counters to be updated may be set in the program, or the value set in the table may be read and set.

In addition, the timer counter to be updated last is set in advance without setting the number of processes first, and the process of updating the timer value is repeatedly executed until the address of the timer counter is reached, or the process is updated at the end. A specific end value (for example, FFh) is stored in the next address of the timer counter to be used, and the process of updating the timer value is repeatedly executed until the value read from the specified address reaches the specific end value. good.

Further, in this embodiment, a 1-byte timer counter and a 2-byte timer counter are provided, and a process of updating the 1-byte timer value and a process of updating the 2-byte timer value are separately provided. Therefore, the capacity of the program and the capacity occupied by the timer value in the RAM 41c can be reduced as compared with the case where the process of updating the 1-byte timer value and the process of updating the 2-byte timer value are shared.

In this embodiment, a 2-byte timer counter is provided to measure a relatively long time corresponding to an initial value exceeding 1 byte. For example, a timer counter having a different update interval, for example, a timer Interruption processing (main) By providing a first timer counter that updates once every four times and a second timer counter that updates once every 14 times, it is relative without providing a 2-byte counter. It may be configured to measure a long time interval, and by doing so, it is not necessary to provide a process of updating the 1-byte timer value and a process of updating the 2-byte timer value, so that the timer value does not need to be provided. It is possible to reduce the program capacity related to the update of.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of timer counters are assigned to a special work that is not initialized according to the progress of the game in the RAM 41c, and are not initialized according to the progress of the game. Regardless of the progress of the game, it is possible to measure the time of the period straddling the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, not only the timer counter whose measurement period may straddle the end timing of one game, that is, the timing when a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game, but also the measurement period is the game. Since the timer counter that does not straddle the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress is also stored in the area allocated to the special work together with the other timer counters, the timer counter can be easily managed. At the same time, a timer counter whose measurement period does not straddle the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game is set, and the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game is set. The usage of the timer counter can be easily changed by a later design change such as changing to a timer counter that may straddle. Further, if one timer counter is shared for a plurality of types of periods in which the measurement periods do not overlap as described above, the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized may be straddled according to the progress of the game. It is possible to measure the measurement period and the measurement period that does not straddle the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game with one timer counter.

When the reel effect flag described later is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in a normal game based on the reel effect flag. Performs a reel effect that fluctuates in a special variation mode (for example, predetermined symbol alignment, reel micro-vibration, reel reverse rotation, reel low-speed rotation, partial rotation that rotates some reels but does not rotate other reels). However, by changing the reels in these special fluctuation modes, a situation advantageous for the player (for example, being controlled by ART described later, the possibility of winning in the ART lottery, the possibility of winning a predetermined role). It is possible to suggest. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of first reel effect and second reel effect can be executed as the reel effect.

The first reel effect is an effect of stopping the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a specific position, that is, aligning a predetermined symbol with the winning line LN. In this embodiment, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are the first reel effects. After slightly vibrating for a predetermined period of time, the winning line LN is aligned with "Red 7-Red 7-Red 7" to stop the red 7 alignment effect, and after the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are slightly vibrated for a predetermined period. , Includes a blue 7 alignment effect that aligns and stops "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7" on the winning line LN.

The second reel effect is an effect that does not stop the reel at a specific position. In this embodiment, as the second reel effect, reel micro-vibration that slightly vibrates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R for a predetermined period is performed. Slight vibration effect, reverse rotation effect of reel 2L, 2C, 2R rotating in the opposite direction to the rotation direction in the normal game for a predetermined period, and reel 2L, 2C, 2R in the normal game. Includes a low-speed rotation effect that rotates at a low speed slower than the rotation speed of.

When a predetermined lottery target combination (strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell in this embodiment) is won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment is controlled by ART (RT0). An ART lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to control the state. In the ART lottery, the ratio according to the type of predetermined lottery target role that has been won (in this embodiment, the ratio of winning in the order of common bell, weak cherry, watermelon, strong cherry is set to be higher. You can win the ART lottery. Then, when the ART lottery is won, the precursor period lottery for determining the length of the period (precursor period) until the start of ART control is performed, and the counting of the precursor period determined in the precursor period lottery is started. At the same time, an ART start effect lottery for determining the type of ART start effect to be executed when starting ART control is performed, and an ART start effect flag capable of specifying the type of ART start effect determined in the ART start effect lottery. Is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. After that, when the precursor period determined by the precursor period lottery elapses, the control of the ART start effect is started, and the reel effect flag corresponding to the type of reel effect specified based on the ART start effect flag is set to the RAM 41c. Is set in the predetermined area of, and the reel effect determined by the ART start effect lottery is executed in the reel control process described later based on the reel effect flag.

In the ART start production lottery, depending on the type of ART won in the ART lottery, either the red 7-matched production or the blue 7-matched production, which is the above-mentioned first reel production, is won, and the ART lottery The higher the advantage for the player of the ART won in the above, the higher the ratio at which the blue 7 matching production can be selected. This suggests that when the blue 7-matched effect is executed as the ART start effect, it is more likely to be controlled by the ART, which is more advantageous to the player than when the red 7-matched effect is executed. On the other hand, even when the red 7 matching effect is executed, there is a possibility that it will be controlled by ART, which is highly advantageous for the player, so it is expected that it will be controlled by ART in the ART start effect. You can enhance the feeling.

In addition, when a predetermined lottery target combination (strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell in this embodiment) is won in the internal lottery, the above-mentioned ART start effect lottery is performed with reference to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the reel effect flag based on the reel effect is set, and if the reel effect flag is not set, whether or not to execute the ART possibility suggestion effect suggesting the possibility of winning the ART lottery is determined. ART possibility suggestion production lottery will be held. In the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery, one of the above-mentioned second reel effect, the slight vibration effect, the reverse rotation effect, and the low speed rotation effect can be selected at a ratio according to the result of the ART lottery. When the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is won, a reel effect flag that can specify the type of the reel effect won in the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Then, in the subsequent reel control process, the reel effect determined by the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is executed as the ART possibility suggestion effect.

On the other hand, when a predetermined lottery target combination (strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell in this embodiment) is won in the internal lottery, and the reel effect flag is set, the ART possibility suggestion effect is produced. By maintaining the state where the reel effect flag based on the ART start effect lottery is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c without performing the lottery, the ART possibility suggestion effect is restricted from being executed, and the ART start effect lottery is performed. The reel effect determined by is prioritized and executed.

In this embodiment, if the reel production flag is not set in the game in which a predetermined lottery target combination (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell) is won in the internal lottery, While the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is performed, when the reel effect flag is set, the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is not performed. However, in the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery target combination (in this embodiment). , Strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell) may be configured to uniformly execute the ART possibility suggestion effect regardless of whether or not the reel effect flag is set. In the configuration, if the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is won and the reel effect flag is not yet set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the reel effect flag is set based on the lottery result in the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery. On the other hand, if the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is won, but the reel effect flag is already set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the reel effect flag is set in association with winning the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery. By maintaining the reel effect flag that has already been set without setting, the game that won the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery will execute the reel effect determined by the above-mentioned ART start effect lottery. In the case of a game, the execution of the reel effect associated with winning the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is restricted, and the reel effect determined by the ART start effect lottery can be preferentially executed.

Further, in the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery, if the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is won in the ART lottery performed in connection with the winning of the predetermined lottery target combination that triggered the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery, the reverse rotation effect is produced. Alternatively, the ratio at which the low-speed rotation effect can be selected is set higher than that when the ART lottery is not won, and the ratio at which the reverse rotation effect can be selected when the ART lottery is won is set. The low-speed rotation effect is set higher than the selectable ratio. As a result, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the reel will be controlled by ART by performing the reel effect (micro-vibration effect, reverse rotation effect, low-speed rotation effect) as the ART possibility suggestion effect, and the reel to be executed. It is possible to suggest the high possibility of being controlled by ART according to the type of effect (in this embodiment, there is a possibility of being controlled by ART in the order of micro-vibration effect, low-speed rotation effect, and reverse rotation effect. (Higher), it is possible to raise the expectation of being controlled by ART in the ART possibility suggestion effect.

In this embodiment, the first reel effect is an effect in which the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are slightly vibrated for a predetermined period, and then the combination of the predetermined symbols is aligned with the winning line LN, but at least the reels 2L, 2C, The effect of stopping the 2R at a specific position, that is, the effect of temporarily stopping the reel at a specific position may be sufficient, and the effect of only stopping the reels 2L, 2C and 2R at a specific position, or the effect of stopping the reels 2L, 2C and 2R Special fluctuation modes that are not performed in a normal game over a predetermined period (for example, predetermined symbol alignment, reel slight vibration, reel reverse rotation, reel low speed rotation, reel partial rotation, control without changing the reel over a predetermined period After controlling the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to a specific position, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped at a specific position, and then the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped at a specific position. A plurality of reels 2L, 2C, 2R, a reel 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped at a specific position after the reels are fluctuated in a part or all of the reel fluctuation modes constituting the second reel effect. It may be an effect of sequentially stopping at a specific position of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second reel effect is an effect in which the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated at a predetermined constant speed after being rotated at a slight vibration, reverse rotation, or low speed for a predetermined period. Any effect that does not stop the reel at a specific position, that is, an effect that fluctuates the reel in a predetermined variation mode without setting a stop control table, is sufficient, and a special variation mode that is not performed in a normal game ( As a mode in which the fluctuation is started after controlling the reel without changing for a predetermined period, a fluctuation mode in a direction different from the normal one, a fluctuation mode at a speed different from the normal speed, etc.), for example, reel micro-vibration, reel reverse. The effect may be varied by a combination of modes such as rotation, low-speed reel rotation, and partial reel rotation.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is a period until the stop operation of the rotating reel is enabled when a predetermined lottery target combination (strong cherry, weak cherry in this embodiment) is won in the internal lottery. Can be delayed for a predetermined time to perform a stop freeze suggesting that a predetermined combination (strong cherry in this embodiment) is likely to be won, and the first stop operation is performed as a stop freeze. A first stop freeze that is executed when it is performed and delays the period until the next stop operation, that is, the activation of the second stop operation, and a first stop freeze that is executed when the second stop operation is performed and the next stop. The operation includes a second stop freeze that delays the period until the third stop operation is activated, and a third stop freeze that executes both the first stop freeze and the second stop freeze.

When a predetermined lottery target combination (strong cherry, weak cherry in this embodiment) is won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 refers to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and refers to a reel based on the above-mentioned ART start effect lottery. A freeze lottery is performed to determine whether or not the effect flag is set, and if the reel effect flag is not set, determine whether or not to perform a stop freeze and the type of stop freeze when performing a stop freeze. , When any of the stop freezes is won in the freeze lottery, a stop freeze flag capable of specifying the type of the stop freeze won in the freeze lottery is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In the subsequent reel control process, the stop freeze is executed at a predetermined timing based on the stop freeze flag.

On the other hand, when a predetermined lottery target combination (strong cherry, weak cherry in this embodiment) is won in the internal lottery, and if the reel production flag is set, the freeze lottery is not performed and the stop freeze flag is set. By not setting the RAM 41c to a predetermined area, the stop freeze is restricted from being executed, and the reel effect determined by the ART start effect lottery is preferentially executed.

In this embodiment, in the game in which a predetermined lottery target combination (strong cherry, weak cherry in this embodiment) is won in the internal lottery, if the reel effect flag is not set, the freeze lottery is performed. In the game in which the freeze lottery is not performed when the reel effect flag is set, but the predetermined lottery target combination (strong cherry, weak cherry in this embodiment) is won in the internal lottery. Regardless of whether or not the reel effect flag is set, the freeze effect may be uniformly executed. In such a configuration, the freeze lottery is won and the reel effect flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. If not, the stop freeze flag is set based on the lottery result in the freeze lottery, while the freeze lottery is won, but if the reel effect flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the stop is stopped. By not setting the freeze flag, if the game that won the freeze lottery is a game in which the reel effect determined by the above-mentioned ART start effect lottery is executed, it is accompanied by winning the freeze lottery. Execution of the stop freeze is restricted, and only the reel effect determined by the ART start effect lottery can be executed.

Further, in the freeze lottery, the first stop freeze is performed at a predetermined ratio according to the type of the winning combination (strong cherry, weak cherry in this embodiment) in the internal lottery that triggered the freeze lottery. , 2nd stop freeze, 3rd stop freeze can be selected, and if a strong cherry is won as a predetermined combination, 1st stop freeze, 2nd stop freeze or 2nd stop freeze. The three stop freezes are selected so that the third stop freeze can be selected at a higher rate than the second stop freeze and the second stop freeze can be selected at a higher rate than the first stop freeze. In addition, when a weak cherry is won, the first stop freeze, the second stop freeze, or the loss can be selected, and the first stop freeze is selected at a higher rate than the second stop freeze. Can be done. As a result, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that a predetermined combination (strong cherry in this embodiment) has been won by performing the stop freeze, and a predetermined combination is determined according to the type of stop freeze to be executed. Can suggest that is likely to have been won (in this example, it is more likely that the strong cherry was won in the order of the first stop freeze, the second stop freeze, and the third stop freeze). , It is possible to raise the expectation that the ART lottery will be held under more favorable conditions.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, by winning the strong cherry in the internal lottery, the combination of the symbols of the corner cherry 1 can be stopped at the winning line LN, while the weak cherry wins, and the corner cherry 2 The combination of symbols can be stopped at the winning line LN, but by performing the stop operation in the stop order with the left reel as the first stop, any combination of the symbols of Kaku Cherry 1 and Kaku Cherry 2 can be stopped at the winning line LN. Even when stopping at, the "cherry" will first stop at the bottom of the left reel 2L, and the player will identify whether the strong cherry or the weak cherry has been won by the internal lottery based on the stop mode. You can't do it. On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment wins the freeze lottery and the stop operation is performed at a different ratio depending on whether the strong cherry is won or the weak cherry is won. Since the stop freeze is executed, the expectation for the possibility that the strong cherry has been won can be increased depending on the mode in which the stop freeze is executed.

Next, the main process executed by the main control unit 41 after the initial setting process and the setting change process will be described. The main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game. Then, one cycle of the main process corresponds to one unit of the game. In this embodiment, the main process is included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the main process, a game start waiting process (Sa1) that waits until the game is started, an internal lottery process (Sa2) that performs an internal lottery when the game is started, a reel 2L, Reel control process (Sa3) that controls the rotation and stop of 2C and 2R, game end setting process (Sa4) that sets various settings when all reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped and the game ends. However, it is repeatedly executed sequentially.

In the game start waiting process, the main control unit 41 first prohibits interrupts, sets the final address of the RAM to be initialized (the final address of the game stack area (unused)), and uses the specified address. Clear the area of RAM 41c shown. At this time, if the main process is started after the setting change process, a special work among the available areas is stored as the start address of the RAM to be initialized when the setting change process is completed. The address next to the final address of the area is set, and in the game start waiting process, the final address of the game stack area (unused) is set as the final address of the RAM to be initialized, and the game RAM area is special. Areas other than the work and the game stack area (in use) (important work, general work, unused area 3, stack area (unused)) will be initialized. Further, at the end of a game that is not in a specific game state, the start address of the RAM to be initialized at the end of the game (the start address of the unused area 3) is set in the game end time setting process (Sa4), and the game starts. Since the final address of the RAM to be initialized (the final address of the game stack area (unused)) is set in the wait process (Sa1), the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) of the usable areas are set. Will be initialized. Further, at the end of the specific game state and at the end of the game, the start address of the RAM to be initialized at the end of the specific game state in the game end time setting process (Sa4) (special of the game RAM area). The final address of the RAM to be initialized at the end of a specific game state (game stack area (unused)) is set (the address next to the final address of the area where the work is stored), and in the game start waiting process. Since the final address of the game RAM area) is set, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area are initialized.

Then, after clearing the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, interrupting is permitted, the player waits in a state where the bet number can be set, the specified number of bets is set according to the game state, and the start switch 7 is operated. Executes the process of starting the game with.

Next, in the internal lottery process (Sa2), whether to allow the winning of each of the above-mentioned combinations based on the random number value for the internal lottery latched at the same time as the game starts by detecting the operation of the start switch 7 (that is, the display result). Performs a process (internal lottery) to determine whether or not to allow the derivation of.

Next, in the reel control process (Sa3), the reel rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R based on the operation of the start switch 7, the result of the internal lottery in the step of Sa2, and the player. When the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, the reel rotation stop processing for stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is executed.

Next, in the game end setting process (Sa4), when it is determined that the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R has stopped in the step of Sa3, the display results derived to each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R are determined. The process of determining whether or not a prize has occurred is executed. Then, when it is determined that a prize has been generated, credits are added and medals are paid out based on the number of payouts according to the prize. When a prize is won, a process of setting the game state is executed in preparation for the next game after the payout of medals is completed. Further, if no winning is generated, after the reels are stopped, a process of setting the game state is executed in preparation for the next game.

In the process of setting the game state, it is determined whether or not it is at the end of a specific game state, and if it is not at the end of a specific game state, the start address of the initialization target RAM at the end of the game is set. , At the end of a specific gaming state, the start address of the initialization target RAM at the end of the specific gaming state is set. Then, returning to the step of Sa1, each process of Sa1 to Sa4 is sequentially and repeatedly executed.

In the main process, a command storage process that generates a command and sets it in the command queue is executed according to the progress of the game, and the set command is executed in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main) during normal operation. It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the command transmission process.

Next, the reel control process executed by the main control unit 41 in the main process will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. The reel control process is a process of rotating and stopping the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, and responds to the reel rotation start process of starting the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C and 2R and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R. A reel rotation stop process for stopping the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is included, and is executed after the internal lottery process in the main process. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the reel control process executed by the main control unit 41, and FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the reel rotation start process executed by the main control unit 41 in the reel control process. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the stop control table setting process executed by the main control unit 41 in the reel control process.

As shown in FIG. 14, in the reel control process, first, the reel rotation start process is executed (Sb1) to start the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the reel rotation start processing, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned reel effect flag is set by referring to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc1). If it is determined in the Sc1 step that the reel effect flag is not set, the wait time (wait time) from the start of reel rotation in the previous game with reference to the wait time counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not about 4.1 seconds) has elapsed (Sc2). Then, when it is determined that the predetermined wait time has not elapsed, the wait time is waited until the wait time elapses, and when the wait time elapses, the wait time counter is initialized (Sc3) to perform a new wait time. Start timing the wait time. The wait time counter is updated every time the timer interrupt process (main) is performed, so that the elapsed time from the start of reel rotation in the previous game is clocked.

After initializing the wait time counter in the Sc3 step, the excitation pattern of the reel motors for starting all the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and accelerating to a predetermined constant speed rotation is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sc4). By setting an excitation pattern for accelerating to a predetermined constant speed rotation, the excitation states of the excitation phases of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are sequentially updated in the subsequent timer interrupt processing (main), and all of them are The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R of the above are accelerated to a predetermined constant speed rotation.

Then, after setting a predetermined excitation pattern in the Sc4 step and starting the acceleration of all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the stop control table setting process described later is executed for all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. (Sc5), a stop control table is set that can specify the number of slip frames for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R at each timing when the stop operation is performed. As a result, the stop control table for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R is set during the acceleration control of each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R by the timer interrupt processing (main).

In the step of Sc5, after the stop control table setting process is performed, a rotation start flag that can identify that the reel rotation has started based on the operation of the start switch 7 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sc6), the process returns to the reel control process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reel effect flag is set in the step of Sc1, it is determined whether or not the type of reel effect is the first reel effect based on the reel effect flag (Sc7), and the first In the case of the one-reel effect, the control of the first reel effect is executed (Sc8). In the first reel effect, after starting the control to slightly vibrate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R for a predetermined period, the stop control table setting process described later is executed, and the reel effect specified based on the reel effect flag is executed. The stop control table is set so that the combination of symbols according to the type is stopped at the winning line LN, and it is set after a predetermined period has passed since the control of the micro vibration of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R was started. The reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped according to the stop control table. Then, with the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R stopped, a predetermined time elapses to end the first reel effect.

After finishing the first reel production, the wait time counter is initialized (Sc9) in the same manner as in the step of Sc3, and the control for starting each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and accelerating to a constant speed rotation is started. The timing to be performed is randomly determined, and the determination result is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the random acceleration start timing (Sc10). After that, it is determined whether or not the random acceleration start time has been reached for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R (Sc11).

When it is determined in the step of Sc11 that the random acceleration start time has been reached for any of the reels, the excitation pattern of the reel motor for starting the corresponding reel and accelerating to a predetermined constant speed rotation is set to RAM 41c. The acceleration is started by setting the predetermined region of (Sc14). Then, it is determined whether or not all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have been set to start acceleration (Sc15), and if there is a reel that has not been set to start acceleration, the process returns to the step of Sc11. For reels that have not been set to start acceleration, it is determined whether or not the random acceleration start time has been reached.

If it is determined in the step of Sc11 that the random acceleration start time has not been reached for any of the reels, it is determined whether or not the stop control table has been set for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R (Sc12). If the stop control table has not been set, the stop control table setting process described later is executed for all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R in the same manner as in the Sc5 step (Sc13), and each reel 2L, 2C, Set the stop control table for 2R. After that, the process returns to the step of Sc11, and then it is determined whether or not the random acceleration start time has been reached for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R (Sc11).

By the steps Sc11 to Sc15, the stop control table is set for all the reels during the acceleration control of each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. Further, by sequentially starting the acceleration of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R based on the random acceleration start timing, the start timing of the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is randomly delayed, and the subsequent reels 2L, 2C are delayed. The positional relationship between the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be made a random relationship, and it is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from becoming a guideline for the timing of the stop operation in the game.

When it is determined in the step of Sc15 that the setting to start acceleration for all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R has been completed, the process proceeds to the step of Sc6, and the rotation start flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc6). , Return to reel control processing.

Further, when it is determined that the reel effect flag is set in the Sc1 step, and when it is determined in the Sc7 step that the type of the reel effect is not the first reel effect, that is, the type of the reel effect is the first. In the case of the two-reel effect, the control of the second reel effect is executed after executing the stop control table setting process described later for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (Sc16), as in the step of Sc4. Sc17). In the second reel effect, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are varied in the above-mentioned special variation mode specified based on the reel effect flag. Then, the second reel effect is terminated when a predetermined time elapses in a state where the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are changed or stopped in a special variation mode.

After finishing the second reel effect, the wait time counter is initialized (Sc18) in the same manner as in the Sc3 step, and each reel 2L accompanying the end of the second reel effect, depending on the mode of the second reel effect, The excitation pattern of the reel motor for accelerating from the 2C and 2R states to a predetermined constant speed rotation is set in a predetermined region of the RAM 41c, acceleration to the constant speed rotation is started (Sc19), and the process proceeds to the Sc6 step. , The rotation start flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the process returns to the reel control process.

After the reel rotation start process is completed and the reel control process is returned, the stop freeze flag indicates whether or not to perform a stop freeze that delays the period until the stop operation of the rotating reel is enabled for a predetermined time. Judgment is made based on (Sb2). When it is determined to perform the stop freeze, the timing specified based on the stop freeze flag, that is, if the stop freeze is the first stop freeze, it is after the first stop operation is performed, and the second stop freeze. If, the delay processing is performed after the second stop operation is performed, and if it is the third stop freeze, the delay processing is performed after the first stop operation is performed and after the second stop operation is performed. Execute (Sb3).

In the delay processing, the elapsed time from the time when the effective stop operation is detected is delayed based on the value of the effective timer that is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and the timing is started in the step of Sb28 described later. It is determined whether or not the time has been reached, and if the value of the effective timer has not reached the predetermined delay time, the process waits until the value of the effective timer reaches the predetermined delay time. Then, when the value of the effective timer reaches a predetermined delay time, the delay process is terminated and the process returns to the reel control process. Effective stop is performed by ending the delay process when it is determined that a predetermined delay time has elapsed based on the value of the valid timer that starts timing when a valid stop operation is detected. Even if the period during which the reel rotation stop processing is executed after the operation is detected fluctuates according to the number of slip frames (0 to 4) when the corresponding reel is stopped, according to the fluctuation. Since the execution period of the delay processing varies, it is possible to execute the processing after the delay processing at a uniform timing after the effective stop operation is detected. As a result, when the sub control unit 91 side performs a predetermined effect during the stop freeze, it is possible to perform an effect that matches the end timing of the stop freeze executed on the main control unit 41 side.

In the delay process of this embodiment, it is determined whether or not a predetermined delay time has elapsed based on the activation timer whose timing is started in the step of Sb28, but an effective stop operation is performed. Any configuration may be used as long as it can determine whether or not a predetermined delay time has been reached based on the elapsed time from the time of detection, and from the time when an effective stop operation is detected by a timekeeping means other than the activation timer. It may be configured to measure the time of.

After executing the delay process in the step Sb3 or after determining that the stop freeze is not performed in the step Sb2, the timer interrupt wait process is executed (Sb4). In the timer interrupt waiting process, the timer interrupt is set to allow and waits until the timer interrupt process (main) is performed once.

After the timer interrupt waiting process in the step of Sb4 is completed, the input / payout error check process is executed (Sb5). In the insertion / withdrawal error check process, an abnormality of the medal selector (hereinafter referred to as a medal insertion error) based on the output of the insertion medal sensor 31 and the like, and an abnormality of the hopper unit 34 based on the output of the payout sensor 34c (hereinafter, medal payout) Detects an error). Then, when at least one of the insertion error and the withdrawal error is detected in the insertion / withdrawal error check process (Sb6), the insertion / withdrawal error flag capable of identifying the generated medal insertion error and the medal payout error is set ( Sb7).

After setting the insertion / withdrawal error flag in the step of Sb7, or after determining that neither the medal insertion error nor the medal withdrawal error has occurred in the step of Sb6, the door open check process is executed (Sb8). It is determined whether or not the output state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed. Then, when it is determined that the output state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed (Sb9), a door command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is set in the command queue of the RAM 41c (Sb10). The door command set in the step of Sb10 will be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the normal command transmission process executed in the next timer interrupt process (main).

After setting the door command in the step of Sb10 or after determining that the output state of the door open detection switch 25 has not changed in the step of Sb9, the rotation error check process is executed (Sb11). In the rotation error check process, among the reels under rotation control for which the stop operation has not been completed, the number of steps since the start of rotation or the previous reel reference position was detected without detecting the reel reference position is the predetermined number of steps (this). In the embodiment, the number of steps is 400, which is set to a value larger than the 336 steps required for the reel to make one revolution.) When there is a reel, the reel rotation is abnormal (hereinafter referred to as a rotation error). When an abnormality is detected, a rotation error flag that can identify the reel in which the rotation error has occurred is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

Then, after the rotation error check process in the step of Sb11 is completed, it is determined whether or not a rotation error has occurred based on the rotation error flag (Sb12), and a rotation error occurs in any of the reels under rotation control. If it is determined that the error counter is in effect, the reel stop operation during rotation control is disabled (Sb13), 1 is added to the error counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb14), and the value of the error counter is added. Is less than a predetermined value (3 in this embodiment) or not (Sb15). Then, when it is determined that the value of the error counter is not less than a predetermined value, that is, when the reel is not rotated normally and a rotation error is detected continuously for a predetermined number of times (three times in this embodiment). , Execute error processing (Sb16). In the error processing, the rotation of all the reels under rotation control is stopped, the rotation error flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is updated so that the reel that has stopped the rotation can be identified, and the rotation error is detected. Is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, an error command that can identify that a rotation error has occurred is set in the command queue, and the command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. After that, it controls and waits in an error state that disables the game so that it does not proceed. After that, when the error state is released by the reset operation, the error processing is terminated, the error counter is initialized, and the error counter is set to 0 (Sb17).

After determining that the value of the error counter is less than a predetermined value in the step of Sb15, or after initializing the error counter in the step of Sb17, the reel in which the rotation error occurs is specified based on the rotation error flag. At the same time, the rotation error flag is released, the excitation pattern of the specified reel is once cleared, the pattern at the time of reel start is newly set, and the reel motor is excited, so that the rotation control is performed again from the beginning and the constant speed. The acceleration process for accelerating again until rotation is executed (Sb18). After that, a reel re-acceleration command that can identify that the corresponding reel has been accelerated again is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb19), and the process returns to the step of Sb4. After that, when the restarted reel is rotated normally, no rotation error is detected in the rotation error check process, and it is determined in the step of Sb12 that no rotation error has occurred. ..

If it is determined in the step of Sb12 that no rotation error has occurred, the timer interrupt is set to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c after the timer interrupt is set to prohibit (Sb20), and the previous timer interrupt process (main). Based on the rotation state information updated by, it is determined whether or not all the reels under rotation control for which the stop operation has not been completed are rotated at a constant speed (Sb21), and all the reels are rotated at a constant speed. If it is determined that the rotation is not performed, the process returns to the step of Sb4. The rotation state information is updated in the timer interrupt process (main), and information that can specify the state of the rotation speed of each reel motor under rotation control at the time when the timer interrupt process (main) is performed. Is. By the timer interrupt process (main) executed in the step of Sb4, the rotation state information is updated to a value that can identify that each reel motor under rotation control is in a constant speed rotation state, so that Sb21 In the step, it is determined that all the reels under rotation control are rotated at a constant speed.

On the other hand, in the step of Sb21, when it is determined that all the reels under rotation control for which the stop operation has not been completed are rotated at a constant speed, whether or not the rotation start flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not it is the first time that all reels have been determined to rotate at a constant speed (Sb22), a rotation start flag is set, and all reels have a constant speed. When it is determined that the rotation is the first time, an acceleration completion command that can identify that the control for accelerating to a constant speed rotation for all reels is completed is set in the command queue of the RAM 41c. (Sb23), the rotation start flag is erased from the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb24).

When it is determined that it is not the first time that all the reels have been determined to rotate at a constant speed in the step of Sb22, that is, the reels under rotation control once reach the constant speed rotation, but a rotation error occurs in the step of Sb12. Is detected and accelerated to constant speed rotation again by the step of Sb17, and when the constant speed rotation is reached again, or when the rotation start flag is erased in the step of Sb24, it is set to RAM 41c. When it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed based on the valid timer (Sb25), the reception of the stop operation is effectively set for the reel whose rotation is being controlled (Sb26). If the acceptance of the stop operation is already enabled for the reel performing the rotation control, the valid state is maintained.

Then, after the reception of the stop operation is effectively set in the step of Sb26, whether or not an effective stop operation is detected for the reel under rotation control, that is, the output of the stop switch of the reel under rotation control is from the off state. It is determined whether or not the state has changed to the on state (Sb27), and if it is determined that an effective stop operation has not been detected, the process returns to the step of Sb4 and the steps Sb4 to Sb27 are repeatedly executed to be effective. Wait until a stop operation is detected.

After that, when a valid stop operation is detected in the step of Sb27, the timer interrupt is permitted after executing the stop operation related process 1 (Sb28) in a state where the timer interrupt is prohibited by the step of Sb20. Is set to (Sb29), and the stop operation-related process 2 is executed (Sb30). In the stop operation related process 1, it is detected in the step of Sb27 based on the operation status of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R updated by the previous timer interrupt process (main), the rotation state of the reel based on the rotation state information, and the like. The number of steps (stop) from the reel reference position at that time for the reel motor of the reel corresponding to the stop operation detected in the step of Sb27 by identifying the reel under rotation control corresponding to the effective stop operation performed. The process of specifying the number of steps to be the operation position), initializing the effective timer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and starting the counting of the elapsed time from the detection of the effective stop operation in the step of Sb26. And so on. Further, in the stop operation-related process 2, a process of invalidating the reception of the reel stop operation corresponding to the effective stop operation detected in the step of Sb27 is performed. The stop operation-related process 1 is a process for performing various controls based on the information updated by the previous timer interrupt process (main), while the stop operation-related process 2 is a timer interrupt process (main). This is a process that performs various controls without being based on the information updated by.

Then, after the stop operation-related process 2 is completed in the step of Sb30, the timer interrupt is set to prohibit again (Sb31), and the reel rotation stop process is executed (Sb32). In the reel rotation stop processing, the stop control table corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation specified in the step of Sb30 is performed is selected, and the stop operation position specified in the step of Sb30 is referred to with reference to the stop control table. The number of steps at the stop position is specified according to the number of steps, the number of slip frames is calculated based on the number of steps at the stop position and the number of steps of the reel motor at the present time, and the number of slide frames is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. To do. The number of sliding frames set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is subsequently referred to in the processing related to the rotation control of the reel motor in the timer interrupt processing, and becomes the number of sliding frames, that is, the number of steps corresponding to the stop position specified by the stop control table. All phases are excited and the reel is stopped.

Then, after executing the reel rotation stop processing, the stop control table setting process described later is executed (Sb33), and the stop control table is set for the remaining reels under rotation control. After executing the stop control table setting process, it is determined in the step of Sb27 whether or not the reel on which the stop operation is detected has stopped (Sb34), and if it is determined that the reel has not stopped, the relevant reel is concerned. It waits until the reels stop, and when it is determined that the reels are stopped, it is determined whether or not all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have been stopped by performing a valid stop operation (Sb35). If all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are not stopped, the process returns to the step of Sb2, and the control of the steps of Sb2 to Sb27 is executed for the remaining reels that are not stopped.

Then, when an effective stop operation is performed for all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and it is determined that all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have stopped in the step of Sb35, after executing the timer interrupt waiting process. (Sb36), the input / withdrawal error check process is executed (Sb37). In the insertion / withdrawal error check process, a medal insertion error and a medal withdrawal error are detected as in the step of Sb5. Then, when at least one of the medal insertion error and the medal payout error is detected in the insertion / withdrawal error check process in the step of Sb37, or when the insertion / withdrawal error flag is set in the step of Sb7, the insertion / withdrawal error occurs. (Sb38), and error processing is executed (Sb39). In the error processing, an error code capable of identifying the type of error occurring, that is, a medal insertion error or a medal payout error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and an error command capable of identifying the error type is displayed in the command queue. After setting the command to the sub-control unit 91 to transmit the command, the game is controlled to an error state that makes it impossible to proceed and waits. After that, the error processing is terminated by canceling the error state by the reset operation.

In this embodiment, the input / payout error flag is set in the step of Sb7, and when it is determined that the input / payout error has occurred in the step of Sb38, the error processing is executed in the step of Sb39, that is, the reel 2L. If a loading / unloading error is detected during rotation control of 2, 2C and 2R, after all reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, error processing is executed based on the detection of the loading / unloading error. Although it is configured, the main control unit 41 may be configured to execute error processing when an input / payout error is detected by the input / payout error check process. Further, regarding an error other than the input / output error, the error processing may be performed when the error is detected, or the error processing may be performed after the reel rotation control is completed.

After determining that no input / payout error has occurred in the step Sb38, or after the error processing in the step Sb39 is completed, whether or not the stop switch for the third stop is in operation, that is, the stop switch for the third stop. Is finished, it is determined whether or not the stop switch is in the off state (Sb40), and if the stop switch is in operation, it waits until the operation is finished. Then, after determining that the stop switch is not in operation, a game end command that can specify that all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have been stopped and the game is finished is set in the command queue (Sb41). .. The game end command set in the step of Sb41 will be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the normal command transmission process executed in the next timer interrupt process (main).

After setting the game end command in the step of Sb41, it is determined whether or not a special combination has won a prize in the game executing this reel control process (Sb42), and if it is determined that the special combination has won a prize, The delay process at the end of the operation is executed (Sb43), and the process waits until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the delay process at the end of the operation. Then, when the predetermined time elapses, the delay process at the end of the operation ends, and the process returns to the reel control process. By executing the operation end delay process, the process after the operation end delay process is delayed for a predetermined time.

Then, after the delay processing at the end of the operation in the step of Sb43 is completed, or after it is determined that the special winning combination has not been won in the step of Sb42, the reel control processing is ended and the process returns to the main processing.

Next, the stop control table setting process executed by the main control unit 41 in the reel control process will be described.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the stop control table setting process, first, whether or not there is an unstopped reel, that is, whether or not there is a reel in which a valid stop operation has not been performed and rotation control is continued. Is determined (Sd1). Then, if there is an unstopped reel, the timer interrupt wait process is executed (Sd2), the timer interrupt is set to allow, and the timer interrupt process (main) is waited for once. After setting the timer interrupt to prohibit (Sd3), the stop control table setting process is performed for one reel whose rotation control is continued (Sd4), and the number of slip frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed is calculated. Set a identifiable stop control table.

Then, after the stop control table setting process is completed for one reel, it is determined whether or not the stop control table setting process has been performed for all the unstopped reels (Sd5), and the stop control table setting process is performed. If there are no unstopped reels remaining, return to the step of Sd2, execute the timer interrupt wait process, go through the step of Sd3, and set the stop control table for the remaining one reel in the step of Sd4. Performs processing and sets the stop control table.

Then, when it is determined that the stop control table has been set for all the unstopped reels in the step of Sd5, or when it is determined that there is no unstopped reel in the step of Sd1, the stop control table setting process is performed. It ends and returns to the reel control process.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the reel control process after the start of the game to start the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and then stops the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. Waits until is detected, and by detecting the operation of the effective stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel at the predetermined stop position stops the rotation of all reels. It is configured to determine whether or not a specific event that may have caused an abnormality has occurred while the rotation of at least one reel is controlled by repeating the process up to.

In such a configuration, after the stop operation is performed during the rotation of the reel, it is determined whether or not an event related to an abnormality has occurred during the period of the stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel. Extra processing is performed during the period during which the stop control is being performed, and there is a risk that the target reel for the stop control will stop at an unintended stop position.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs the reel rotation start processing for starting the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the reel control processing, and then the effective stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. It waits until the operation is detected, and when the effective stop operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, the reel rotation stop processing for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed, and the reel rotation starts. During the period of waiting until the operation of the effective stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected after the processing, the abnormality determination processing for determining whether or not a specific event that may have caused an abnormality has occurred is executed. Therefore, in a state where most of the reel is rotating, a specific event can be determined, but the reel rotation is stopped by the reel rotation stop process after the effective stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R operation is detected. During the period up to, the abnormality determination process is not executed, so the load during the process related to reel stop is reduced. Therefore, extra processing is performed during reel stop control, and the target reel for stop control is in an unintended position. It is possible to prevent the reel from stopping.

In the reel control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is one of the abnormality determination processes during the period of waiting until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R effective after the reel rotation start process is detected. By executing the insertion / withdrawal error check process, it is determined based on the output of the insertion medal sensor 31 whether or not there is a possibility that an abnormality related to the insertion of medals from the medal insertion unit 4 has occurred. In the state that occupies most of the inside, it is possible to determine an abnormality related to the insertion of medals as a specific event, but after the operation of the effective stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, the reel rotation is stopped by the reel rotation stop processing. Since the loading / unloading error check process is not executed during the period until the reel is stopped, the load during the process related to the reel stop is reduced. Therefore, the target reel of the stop control is affected by the extra process performed during the reel stop control. It is possible to prevent the reel from stopping at an unintended position.

In the reel control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is one of the abnormality determination processes during the period of waiting until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R effective after the reel rotation start process is detected. By executing the input / payout error check process, it is determined based on the output of the payout sensor 34c whether or not there is a possibility that an abnormality related to the payout of medals by the hopper unit 34 has occurred, so that most of the reels are rotating. In the state of occupying, while it is possible to determine an abnormality related to the payout of medals as a specific event, after the operation of the effective stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected until the reel rotation is stopped by the reel rotation stop processing. Since the loading / unloading error check process is not executed during the period, the load during the process related to the stop of the reel is reduced. Therefore, extra processing is performed during the stop control of the reel, so that the target reel of the stop control is in an unintended position. It is possible to prevent the reel from stopping.

In the reel control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is one of the abnormality determination processes during the period of waiting until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R effective after the reel rotation start process is detected. By executing the rotation error check process as, it is determined based on the output of the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R whether or not there is a possibility that an abnormality related to the rotation of the reel has occurred. In the occupied state, while it is possible to determine an abnormality related to reel rotation as a specific event, the period from when the operation of the effective stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected until the reel rotation is stopped by the reel rotation stop processing. Since the rotation error check process is not executed, the load during the process related to the reel stop is reduced. Therefore, extra processing is performed during the reel stop control, so that the target reel of the stop control is a reel at an unintended position. Can be prevented from stopping.

In the reel control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is one of the abnormality determination processes during the period of waiting until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R effective after the reel rotation start process is detected. By executing the door open check process, it is determined whether or not the output state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed. Therefore, in a state where most of the reel is rotating, the door open detection switch 25 is a specific event. While it is possible to determine whether or not a change has occurred in the output state of the reel, the period from the detection of the effective operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R until the reel rotation is stopped by the reel rotation stop processing Since the door open check process is not executed, the load during the process related to the reel stop is reduced, and the reel stops at a position where the target reel of the stop control is not intended due to extra processing being performed during the reel stop control. You can prevent it from happening.

While the main control unit 41 of this embodiment executes the reel control process in the main process, it periodically interrupts during the execution of the main process to execute the timer interrupt process (main), and in the reel control process, the reel After performing the reel rotation start processing to start the rotation of 2L, 2C, and 2R, the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed during the period of waiting until the operation of the effective stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. Each time it is executed, an abnormality determination process is executed to determine whether or not a specific event has occurred. Therefore, an abnormality determination is made during a period of waiting until an operation of a valid stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. Since the processing does not have to be executed all the time, the processing load can be reduced.

In the reel control process, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment detects an effective stop operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R after performing the reel rotation start process for starting the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. By doing so, the control for stopping the reel rotation by performing the reel rotation stop processing for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is repeated until the rotation of all the reels is stopped, and the reel rotation stop processing is performed for the reel. If there is a reel that is still rotating after the reel is stopped, the abnormality determination process is executed during the period until the stop operation of the effective stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, so that the reel stop control is in progress. It is possible to judge a specific event while reducing the load on the reel.

Further, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to execute input / payout error check processing, rotation error processing, and door open check processing as abnormality determination processing, and after the reel rotation stop processing is performed to stop the reels. , When there is a reel that is still rotating, the abnormality determination process is executed until the effective stop operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, so the load during reel stop control is reduced. At the same time, it is possible to determine whether or not an abnormality related to the insertion of the medal, an abnormality related to the payout of the medal, an abnormality related to the rotation of the reel, and a change in the output state of the door open detection switch 25 have occurred as specific events.

When the main control unit 41 of this embodiment detects an effective stop operation in the reel control process and stops the rotation of the corresponding reel, there are still reels that are being controlled for rotation. While executing the abnormality determination process every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, it is determined whether or not the stop operation has been performed until a predetermined time elapses after the previous stop operation is detected. After waiting without waiting and the predetermined time has elapsed, whether the reception of the next stop operation is enabled and the abnormality determination process and the stop operation are performed every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. It waits while executing the determination of whether or not, and when an effective stop operation is detected, the control for stopping the corresponding reel is repeated until the rotation of all the reels is stopped, and the effective stop is performed. Since the abnormality determination process is executed even during the period from the detection of the operation to the activation of the reception of the next stop operation and the period during which it is not determined whether or not the stop operation has been performed. A specific event can be determined even during this period.

In particular, in the reel control process, when the reception of the next stop operation is enabled, the reception of the next stop operation is enabled after the valid stop operation is detected based on the activation timer. It is determined whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed, and if the predetermined period has elapsed, the acceptance of the next stop operation is enabled. Therefore, a valid stop operation is detected and the reel is stopped. Although the time until the reeling is performed depends on the number of slip frames at the time of stopping (0 to 4 in this embodiment), the next stop is performed after an effective stop operation is detected regardless of the number of slip frames. The period until the operation reception is activated can be fixed. Then, the main control unit 41 determines an abnormality each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed even in the period from the detection of the effective stop operation to the activation of the reception of the next stop operation. Since the process is executed, a specific event can be determined even during the relevant period.

Further, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to execute input / payout error check processing, rotation error processing, and door open check processing as abnormality determination processing, and does not determine whether or not a stop operation has been performed. Since the abnormality determination process is executed even during the period, whether the abnormality related to the insertion of medals, the abnormality related to the payout of medals, the abnormality related to the rotation of the reel, or the output state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed as specific events during the period. Whether or not it can be determined.

While the main control unit 41 of this embodiment executes the reel control process in the main process, it periodically interrupts during the execution of the main process to execute the timer interrupt process (main), and in the reel control process, the reel After performing the reel rotation start processing to start the rotation of 2L, 2C, and 2R, it stops every time the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed during the period of waiting until a valid stop operation is detected. Since it is determined whether or not an operation has been detected, it is not necessary to constantly determine whether or not a stop operation has been detected during the period of waiting until a valid stop operation is detected, so that the processing load can be reduced. ..

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the reel control process is executed in the main process, while the timer interrupt process (main) is executed by periodically interrupting the main process during execution. In, after starting the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the timer interrupt is set to prohibit and the timer interrupt is prohibited, based on the predetermined information updated by the timer interrupt process (main). Then, it is determined whether or not all the reels under rotation control are rotating at a constant speed rotation, and when it is determined that all the reels are rotating at a constant speed rotation, a process for enabling the stop operation is executed. Then, it is determined whether or not a valid stop operation is detected, and when a valid stop operation is detected, it is specified which reel the stop operation corresponds to, and the specified reel is specified. For the reel motor corresponding to, the process of specifying the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time (the number of steps to be the stop operation position) based on the predetermined information updated by the timer interrupt process (main), etc. Since the stop operation-related process 1 is executed, these processes are executed in a series of prohibited states in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited and predetermined information is not updated by the timer interrupt process (main). Therefore, the timer interrupt process (main) as a reference can be matched in each process executed in a series of prohibited states.

Further, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited when an effective stop operation is detected after starting the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the reel control process. The number of steps of the reel motor at the present time updated by the timer interrupt process (main) and the number of steps of the reel stop operation position specified when the stop operation is performed with the timer interrupt prohibited. When the number of sliding frames is specified from the stop control table based on the above, the reel rotation stop processing for stopping the corresponding reel based on the number of sliding frames is executed, and then the reels under rotation control remain. Since the stop control table setting process for setting the stop control table for those reels is executed, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed during the execution of these processes, and the control in these processes is intended. Since it is possible to avoid interruption without interruption, these processes are not complicated.

In this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 determines that all the reels under rotation control are rotating at a constant speed, the stop operation-related process 1 is terminated after a valid stop operation is detected. The period until the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed is less than the period until the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed, the period until the main control unit 41 executes the reel rotation stop processing, and the period for executing the processing for setting one stop control table. Even if the timer interrupt process (main) is set to the prohibited state in the period, the control performed by the timer interrupt process (main), for example, the excitation control of the reel motor, etc. is affected. There is no such thing.

Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not all the reels under rotation control are rotating at a constant speed after setting the timer interrupt processing (main) to be prohibited, and the reels. Is rotated at a constant speed, the stop operation is enabled, the stop operation related process 1 is executed after a valid stop operation is detected, and the timer interrupt process is executed after the stop operation related process 1 is completed. From the configuration for releasing the prohibition of (main), that is, from the process of determining the constant speed rotation of the reel to the process of enabling the stop operation and the process of detecting the effective stop operation, until the stop operation related process 1 is executed. Is configured to execute control in a series of timer interrupt prohibited states. For example, when a valid stop operation is detected, the timer interrupt prohibited state is temporarily released, and then the stop operation related process 1 By setting the timer interrupt to prohibit again when executing the above, the prohibited state of the series of timer interrupts may be divided into a plurality of states. With such a configuration, the timer interrupt process (main) can be executed between these processes, so that the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) is not restricted more than necessary. ..

In this way, in the configuration in which the prohibited state of the series of timer interrupts is divided into a plurality of states, for example, the prohibited state is divided into a first prohibited state and a second prohibited state, and the reel is rotating at a constant speed. The process of determining whether or not the reel is rotating at a constant speed and the process of enabling the stop operation based on the fact that the reel is rotating at a constant speed are executed in the first prohibited state, and whether a valid stop operation is detected. By executing the process of determining whether or not the process and the stop operation-related process 1 in the second prohibited state, in the first prohibited state, the timer interrupt performed immediately before the first prohibited state is executed. When it is determined that the reel is in the rotating state based on the rotation state information updated by the process (main), the stop operation can be enabled, while in the second prohibited state, the second The stop operation position is set based on the information related to the detection of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R updated by the timer interrupt process (main) performed immediately before the prohibited state of, and the number of steps from the reel reference position. Since it can be specified, the timer interrupt process (main) as a reference can be matched during a series of processes.

Further, as described above, in the reel control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the reel rotation start process before effectively setting the reception of the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. A stop control table for executing a reel effect using a reel in the reel rotation start process, executing a stop control table setting process after the end of the reel effect, and performing stop control for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. It is a configuration to set.

In such a configuration, since the stop control table is set after the reel effect is completed, the stop control table may not be set in time when the reel is not stopped after the reel effect and the rotation is shifted to a predetermined constant speed as it is. , There is a risk that the activation of the stop operation will be delayed.

On the other hand, in the reel control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the reel rotation start process before validly setting the reception of the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. It is a configuration that executes a reel effect in the reel rotation start process, and as a reel effect, a first reel effect that stops the reel at a specific position and a second reel effect that does not stop the reel at a specific position are executed. If it is possible and the first reel effect is executed in the reel rotation start process, the stop control table setting process is executed after the end of the first reel effect to stop all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When the control table is set and the second reel effect is executed, the stop control table setting process is executed before the second reel effect is executed to stop control for all reels 2L, 2C and 2R. Since the table is set, when the first reel effect is executed, when the first reel effect is finished, control for accelerating the reel to rotate at a constant speed until the stop operation is effective. Even if the stop control table is set after the end of the first reel effect, acceleration control is also performed. Therefore, the setting of the stop control table may delay the activation of the stop operation more than necessary. On the other hand, when the second reel effect is executed, that is, when the control for accelerating to make the reel rotate at a constant speed after the end of the second reel effect is less than that of the first reel effect, By setting the stop control table before the end of the second reel effect, that is, by completing the setting of the stop control table before the end of the second reel effect, the stop operation is effective by setting the stop control table. It is possible to prevent the conversion from being delayed.

Further, when the first reel effect is executed, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the stop control table setting process after the end of the first reel effect, and each reel 2L, 2C in the game. Since the stop control table for performing stop control is set for 2R, the area of RAM 41c for setting the stop control table for stopping the reel with the first reel effect and the stop control for stopping the reel in the game The area of the RAM 41c in which the table is set can be a common predetermined area.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 stops the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R so that the predetermined symbols are aligned with the winning line LN at the end of the first reel production, and then accelerates the reels to constant speed rotation. When making the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are randomly delayed to start the rotation in sequence, as the first reel effect, the combination of predetermined symbols is stopped without being aligned with the winning line LN. At the same time, without controlling to randomly delay the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reels that are stopped due to the end of the first reel effect are moved at the same timing as when the normal rotation starts. It may be configured to start and accelerate to a constant speed rotation, and even in such a configuration, when the first reel effect is executed, stop control is performed after the end of the first reel effect, as in the present embodiment. By setting the table, the activation of the stop operation is not delayed more than necessary due to the setting of the stop control table.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first reel effect is executed, the main control unit 41 executes the stop control table setting process after the end of the first reel effect, and all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Although the configuration is such that the stop control table is set for, at least the configuration is such that the setting of the stop control table is started for the game after the control of the reel using the stop control table is completed in the first reel effect. For example, even during the production of the first reel, when the control for stopping the combination of predetermined stop symbols on the winning line LN is completed, the stop control table setting process for the game is started, so that the first reel The configuration may be such that the stop control table is set in parallel with the control of the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the second reel effect is executed, the main control unit 41 executes the stop control table setting process before starting the second reel effect, and all for the game. Although the configuration is such that the stop control table is set for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R of the above, the main control unit 41 may be configured to execute the stop control table setting process at least before the end of the second reel effect. The stop control table may be set during the execution of the reel effect, that is, in parallel with the control of the second reel effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 refers to the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b in the stop control table setting process, and the timing at which the stop operation is performed for each rotating reel. By setting a different number of sliding frames to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c so that it can be specified, a stop control table is created and set in advance before the stop operation is performed on the rotating reel. The setting process may be a process of setting the stop control table in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in advance before the stop operation becomes effective for the rotating reel, and the stop control table stored in the ROM 41b may be set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The stop control table is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c by duplicating to, and the stop control table stored in the compressed state in the ROM 41b is expanded and set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to set the stop control table. Configuration, a configuration in which a stop control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by duplicating or expanding a part of the stop control table stored in the ROM 41b in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and a table stored in the ROM 41b. Without referring to the index and table creation data, the process of searching and specifying the stop position that can be stopped according to the timing of the stop operation and setting it in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed for the timing of all the stop operations. As a result, a stop control table is created and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in advance. A reference stop control table stored in the ROM 41b is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and then a part of the stop control table is set. It may be a configuration in which a stop control table is created by changing according to a game situation and the like and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in advance, a configuration in which a stop control table is created and set by combining these configurations, and the like. ..

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether or not to perform the reel effect in the reel rotation start process in the reel control process, and if it is determined that the reel effect is not performed, all the reels 2L and 2C. After starting the control to accelerate 2R to a predetermined constant speed rotation, the stop control table setting process is executed to set the stop control table for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, so that the reels 2L, 2C, Since the stop control table is set before the 2R rotates at a constant speed, the operations of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R can be immediately enabled after the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate at a constant speed. ..

In the embodiment, when the main control unit 41 determines that the reel effect is not performed in the reel rotation start processing, the main control unit 41 starts the control for accelerating all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to a predetermined constant speed rotation. After that, the stop control table is set for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, but when it is determined that the reel effect is not performed, after the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started, a predetermined value is set. It suffices if the stop control table is set for the reel under rotation control until it is accelerated to constant speed rotation, and if it is determined that the reel effect is not performed, the stop control table during rotation control is used. After making the settings, a configuration that executes control to accelerate all reels 2L, 2C, 2R to a predetermined constant speed rotation, control to accelerate the reels to a predetermined constant speed rotation, and a reel stop control table during rotation control It may be configured to execute the process of setting in parallel.

As the reel effect, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment can execute a second reel effect in which the variation mode when accelerating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is different from that of the normal game, and the reel control process. When the second reel effect is executed in the reel rotation start process in, the stop control table setting process is executed before the end of the second reel effect, and the stop control table is set for all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Is set, so that even if the reels rotate at a constant speed immediately after the end of the second reel effect, the operations of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R can be immediately enabled.

In the reel control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment starts the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, and then determines that the acceleration of all the reels is completed and the rotation becomes a constant speed. After setting the acceleration completion command that can specify that the acceleration of the reel has been completed and transmitting it to the sub control unit 91, in the reel control process, the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is started. , When the rotation error check process is executed and a rotation abnormality of any of the reels is detected, the re-acceleration manual process is executed to accelerate the corresponding reel again, and then it is determined that the reel has reached a constant speed rotation. In this case, the command is not transmitted without setting the acceleration completion command. Therefore, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the acceleration completion command, the acceleration is not completed again due to the reel rotation abnormality, but after the game starts. The sub-control unit 91 can identify that the first acceleration is completed, and the sub-control unit 91 is accompanied by the first constant speed rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R based on the acceleration completion command (for example, the first). Instructions for stop operation) can be executed.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is based on the lottery result of the internal lottery in the game in which a predetermined lottery target combination (strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell in this embodiment) is won in the internal lottery. When the ART lottery to be performed is won, the reel effect is executed as the ART start effect in the game after the precursory period has elapsed, that is, the predetermined game is determined by the internal lottery in the game before the game in which the reel effect is executed. Since the reel effect can be executed according to the winning combination of the lottery target, the ART lottery is performed as a specific condition established in the game prior to the game in which the reel effect is executed, that is, it is determined by the internal lottery. By establishing that the winning combination of the lottery targets is established, it is possible to draw attention to the trends after the game.

In this embodiment, the specific condition established in the game prior to the game in which the reel effect is executed is that the predetermined lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery prior to the game in which the reel effect is executed. However, it suffices if the conditions are satisfied in the game before the game that executes the reel effect. For example, a predetermined number of games have been played before the game that executes the reel effect, or a game that executes the reel effect. The combination of predetermined symbols was stopped at the winning line LN in the previous multiple games, and the lottery executed independently of the internal lottery was won in the game before the game in which the reel effect was executed. Etc. may be used. Further, the reel effect may be executed when a predetermined number of games have elapsed since the specific condition is satisfied, or the reel effect is executed when another condition is satisfied after the game in which the specific condition is satisfied. It may be configured to be used.

Further, in this embodiment, when the ART lottery is won, the reel effect is executed as the ART start effect in the game after the precursory period has elapsed, and the reel is placed at a specific position as the reel effect. Although the first reel effect to be stopped is applied, the second reel effect that does not stop the reel at a specific position may be applied as the reel effect, and even with such a configuration. , By establishing that a predetermined lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery, it is possible to draw attention to the trends after the game.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment performs an ART possibility suggestion effect lottery in a game in which a predetermined lottery target combination (in this embodiment, a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a watermelon, and a common bell) is won in the internal lottery. , When the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is won, it is possible to execute the reel effect as the ART possibility suggestion effect in the game. Therefore, as a predetermined condition, the game in which the predetermined lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery. You can pay attention to the trend of.

In this embodiment, an ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is performed based on the winning of a predetermined lottery target combination in the internal lottery, and when the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is won, the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is performed. In the game in which the internal lottery was performed, which triggered the above, the reel effect is executed as the ART possibility suggestion effect, but the reel effect as the ART possibility suggestion effect is a predetermined condition in the game in which the reel effect is performed. It may be executed based on the fact that the conditions other than the internal lottery (such as the winning result of the ART lottery) are satisfied.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is won, the reel effect is executed as the ART possibility suggestion effect in the game won in the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery. As the effect, the second reel effect that does not stop the reel at a specific position is applied, but as the reel effect, the first reel effect that stops the reel at a specific position may be applied. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the trends after the game by establishing that a predetermined lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery.

When the main control unit 41 of this embodiment wins an ART lottery based on the winning of a predetermined lottery target combination (strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell in this embodiment) in the internal lottery. In addition to being able to execute a reel effect as an ART start effect after the precursory period has elapsed, in a game in which a predetermined lottery target combination is won in an internal lottery, an ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is performed. When the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is won, the reel effect can be executed as the ART possibility suggestion effect in the game, and the ART start effect is executed in the game won the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery. In this case, the execution of the ART possibility suggestion effect is restricted and only the ART start effect is executed. Therefore, as a specific condition, the reel effect is performed in advance based on the fact that a predetermined lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery. In the situation where it is decided to be executed, as a predetermined condition, the reel production based on the fact that the predetermined lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery is restricted, so that the control associated with executing the reel production is complicated. It never becomes.

Further, as described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the stop control table setting process in the reel control process, and sets the stop control table for performing stop control for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. It is a configuration to do.

In such a configuration, when a stop operation of one reel is performed in a situation where a plurality of reels are rotating, a stop control table is further set for the remaining reels after the reel for which the stop operation has been stopped is stopped. Then, after the stop of one reel, the setting of the stop control table for the remaining reels may not be in time, or the activation of the stop operation may be delayed.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the stop control table setting process when an effective stop operation is detected in the reel control process, and the remaining rotation control is still performed. Since the stop control table is set for the reels, and then control is performed to detect the stop operation for the remaining reels when it is determined that all the reels are not stopped, eventually during the fluctuation of a plurality of reels. When the stop switch corresponding to that reel is operated, the stop control table is set for the other reels under rotation control before the reel corresponding to the stop switch is stopped, and by setting the stop control table. It is possible to prevent the activation of the stop switch from being delayed.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines whether or not there is an unstopped reel in the stop control table setting process executed in the reel control process, and if there is an unstopped reel, the main control unit 41 is not stopped. By sequentially performing the process of setting the stop control table for one of the reels of the above reels for all the unstopped reels, one of the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is in rotation control. When the corresponding stop switch is operated, the stop control table of the other two reels under rotation control is set before the reel corresponding to the stop switch is stopped, and one of them is set during the rotation control of the two reels. When the stop switch corresponding to the reel is operated, the stop control table of the other reel under rotation control is set before the reel corresponding to the stop switch is stopped, so that the reel is stopped in any situation. It is possible to prevent the activation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R from being delayed due to the setting of the control table.

While the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the reel control process in the main process, the main control unit 41 periodically interrupts during the execution of the main process to execute the timer interrupt process (main), and controls in the reel control process. The configuration is such that the table setting process is executed to set the stop control table of the reel under rotation control. In the control table setting process, the timer interrupt process (main) is waited until the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, and the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. Every time the main) is executed, the control to set the stop control table for one reel under rotation control is repeatedly executed to set the stop control table for all the reels under rotation control. Control is not complicated because the timer interrupt process (main) is unintentionally executed during the period in which the set process is performed.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 sets a stop control table for one reel under rotation control each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed in the control table setting process executed in the reel control process. By repeatedly executing the control to set, the process of setting the stop control table for all reels under rotation control is divided and executed for each reel under rotation control, but the timer is interrupted. The process of setting the stop control table for all reels under rotation control may be divided into a plurality of processes so that one process is completed in a time less than the time interval in which the process (main) is executed. For example, the process of setting the stop control table for one reel under rotation control is divided into a plurality of stages, and each time one stage is completed, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, and then the next stage process. The stop control table may be set for all the reels under rotation control by repeatedly performing the control for executing. Even in such a configuration, the control is not complicated because the timer interrupt process (main) is executed at an unintended timing during the period in which the stop control table setting process is performed.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment performs a freeze lottery when a predetermined lottery target combination (strong cherry, weak cherry in this embodiment) is won in the internal lottery, and the stop freeze is won in the freeze lottery. If this is the case, when the stop switch corresponding to one of the reels is operated during the rotation control of a plurality of reels, the delay processing for delaying the activation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel under the other rotation control is performed. It is possible to execute, and when a stop operation by an effective stop switch is detected in the reel control process, control is performed to stop the reel corresponding to the stop operation, and the other reels under rotation control are stopped. When the delay process is executed after the control table setting process is performed, that is, when the delay process is executed based on winning the freeze lottery, the reels under other rotation control are executed before the delay process is started. Since the stop control table is set, the operation of the stop switch can be enabled immediately after the delay processing is completed.

17 to 19 are diagrams for explaining the types of combinations, symbol combinations, and technical matters related to the combinations in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the symbol combination of the transition roll in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and the technical matters related to the transition roll. Further, FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41, and FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an outline of the gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 17, the special winning combination includes two types of bonuses: a big bonus (hereinafter, the big bonus is referred to as BB) and a regular bonus (hereinafter, the regular bonus is referred to as RB). BB wins a prize when the combination of "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7" is aligned on the winning line LN at RT0-4. If you win the BB, you will shift to a big bonus that is controlled every game by the regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB) described later. The big bonus ends on the condition that 316 or more medals have been paid out. The RB wins when the combination of "blue 7-red 7-red 7" is aligned on the winning line LN at RT0-4. If you win the RB, you will be transferred to a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB). Then, the regular bonus ends on the condition that any of the roles wins 6 times or has completed 12 games. As shown in FIG. 21, it is controlled by RT4 from winning either BB or RB until winning, and after the big bonus or regular bonus (collectively referred to as bonus) is completed, it is controlled by RT3. The Rukoto.

As shown in FIG. 18, among the winning combinations, the small winning combination includes the upper bell 1, the upper bell 2, the upper bell 3, the upper bell 4, the upper bell 5, the upper bell 6, the upper bell 7, the upper bell 8, and the middle bell. , Right-down bell, middle-tier watermelon, right-down watermelon, horn cherry 1, horn cherry 2. Hereinafter, when it is not necessary to distinguish the upper bell 1, the upper bell 2, the upper bell 3, the upper bell 4, the upper bell 5, the upper bell 6, the upper bell 7, and the upper bell 8, they are simply referred to as the upper bell. ..

The upper bell 1 has "Replay a-Cherry a-Cherry a", "Replay a-Cherry a-White 7", "Replay a-Cherry a-BAR", and "Replay a" on the winning line LN in any game state. -Cherry b-Cherry a "," Replay a-Cherry b-White 7 ", and" Replay a-Cherry b-BAR "will be awarded when the combination is complete, and the upper bell 1 will be awarded in any game state. Sometimes eight medals are paid out. The upper bell 2 will be awarded when the combination of "Replay a-cherry a-plum" and "Replay a-cherry b-plum" is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state, and in any gaming state. Eight medals will be paid out when the upper bell 2 wins. The upper bell 3 is when the winning line LN has a combination of "Replay a-Plum-Cherry a", "Replay a-Plum-White 7", and "Replay a-Plum-BAR" in any game state. A prize is won, and eight medals are paid out when the upper bell 3 wins in any game state. The upper bell 4 wins when the winning line LN has a combination of "replay a-plum-plum" in any game state, and eight medals when the upper bell 4 wins in any game state. Is paid out. The upper bell 5 has "Replay b-cherry a-cherry a", "Replay b-cherry a-white 7", "Replay b-cherry a-BAR", and "Replay b" on the winning line LN in any game state. -Cherry b-Cherry a "," Replay b-Cherry b-White 7 ", and" Replay b-Cherry b-BAR "will be awarded when the combination is complete, and the upper bell 5 will be awarded in any game state. Sometimes eight medals are paid out. The upper bell 6 is awarded when the combination of "Replay b-cherry a-plum" and "Replay b-cherry b-plum" is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state. Eight medals will be paid out when the upper bell 6 wins. The upper bell 7 is when the winning line LN has a combination of "Replay b-Plum-Cherry a", "Replay b-Plum-White 7", and "Replay b-Plum-BAR" in any game state. A prize is won, and eight medals are paid out when the upper bell 7 wins in any game state. The upper bell 8 wins when the winning line LN has a combination of "replay a-plum-plum" in any gaming state, and eight medals when the upper bell 8 wins in any gaming state. Is paid out. By aligning the combinations of the symbols constituting the upper bells 1 to 8 on the winning line LN, the combinations of "bell-bell-bells" can be aligned on the invalid line LM1.

The middle bell will be awarded when the winning line LN has a combination of "bell-bell-bell" in any game state, and eight medals will be paid out when the middle bell is won in any game state. .. The downward-sloping bell is "Replay a-Bell-Red 7", "Replay a-Bell-Replay a", "Replay b-Bell-Red 7", "Replay b-Bell" on the winning line LN in any game state. A prize will be awarded when the combination of "-Replay a" is complete, and eight medals will be paid out when the downward-sloping bell wins in any game state.

The middle watermelon will be awarded when the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is aligned on the winning line LN in any game state, and 5 medals will be paid out when the middle watermelon wins in any game state. .. The downward-sloping watermelon wins when the combination of "Bell-watermelon-cherry b" is aligned on the winning line LN in any game state, and 5 medals when the downward-sloping watermelon wins in any game state. Will be paid out. By aligning the combinations of the symbols constituting the downward-sloping watermelon on the winning line LN, the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" can be aligned on the invalid line LM3.

Kaku Cherry 1 wins when the combination of "Red 7-Bell-Bell" and "BAR-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line LN in any game state, and Kaku Cherry is awarded in any game state. When a prize is won, one medal will be paid out. Kaku Cherry 2 will be awarded when the combination of "Red 7-Bell-Replay a" and "BAR-Bell-Replay a" is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state, and Kaku Cherry 2 will be awarded in any gaming state. When Cherry 2 wins, one medal will be paid out.

As shown in FIG. 19, among the winning roles, the replay roles include middle-stage replay, upward-sloping replay, promotion replay, special replay, fall replay, red 7-matched replay, red 7 missed replay, blue 7-matched replay, and blue 7 Includes missed replays.

The middle replay is a prize when the combination of "replay a-replay a-replay a" and "replay b-replay a-replay a" is aligned on the winning line LN in RT0 to RT4, and the replay game (replay) is played. Granted. The upward-sloping replay is awarded when the combination of "Bell-Replay a-Red 7" or "Bell-Replay a-Bell" is aligned on the winning line LN in RT1 to RT4, and the replay game (replay) is given. To. The promotion replay is awarded when the combination of "bell-replay a-replay a" is aligned with the winning line LN in RT1, and the replay game (replay) is given. The special replay is awarded when the combination of "replay a-replay a-bell" and "replay b-replay a-bell" is aligned on the winning line LN at RT0, and the replay game (replay) is given. Fall replays are "Bell-Red 7-Cherry a", "Bell-Red 7-Watermelon", "Bell-Red 7-Plum", "Bell-Watermelon-Cherry a", "Bell-Red 7-Cherry a" on the winning line LN at RT0 and RT2. Win a prize when the combination of "Bell-Watermelon-Watermelon", "Bell-Watermelon-Plum", "Bell-Cherry a-Cherry a", "Bell-Cherry a-Watermelon", "Bell-Cherry a-Plum" is complete. And a replay game (replay) is given. The red 7-matched replay is awarded when the combination of "replay b-blue 7-replay a" is aligned on the winning line LN in RT2, and the replay game (replay) is given. Red 7 Missed Replay is "Replay a-Blue 7-Replay a", "Replay a-Watermelon-Replay a", "Replay a-Cherry a-Replay a", "Replay b-Watermelon-" on the winning line LN in RT2. When the combination of "replay a" and "replay b-cherry a-replay a" is complete, a prize is awarded and a replay game (replay) is given. The blue 7 matching replay will be awarded when the combination of "watermelon-blue 7-replay a" is aligned on the winning line LN in RT2, and the replay game (replay) will be given. Blue 7 Missed Replay will be on the winning line LN at RT2 as "Watermelon-Watermelon-Replay a", "Watermelon-Cherry a-Replay a", "Bell-Blue 7-Replay a", "Bell-Watermelon-Replay a" or When the combination of "Bell-Cherry a-Replay a" is complete, a prize will be awarded and a replay game (replay) will be awarded.

By aligning the combinations of "replay b-blue 7-replay a" constituting the red 7 matching replay on the winning line LN, the combination of "red 7-red 7-red 7" can be aligned on the invalid line LM2. Further, when the combination of "cherry a-blue 7-replay a" constituting the blue 7 matching replay is aligned with the winning line LN, the combination of "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7" can be aligned with the invalid line LM4.

As shown in FIG. 20, the transition rolls are "Replay a-cherry a-bell", "Replay a-cherry b-bell", "Replay a-plum-bell", "Replay b-cherry a-bell". , "Replay b-Cherry b-Bell", "Replay b-Plum-Bell", "Replay a-Bell-Cherry a", "Replay a-Bell-White 7", "Replay a-Bell-BAR", " "Replay a-Bell-Plum", "Replay b-Bell-Cherry a", "Replay b-Bell-White 7", "Replay b-Bell-BAR", "Replay b-Bell-Plum", "Bell-Cherry" "a-cherry a", "bell-cherry a-white 7", "bell-cherry a-BAR", "bell-cherry a-plum", "bell-cherry b-cherry a", "bell-cherry b-" White 7 ”,“ Bell-Cherry b-BAR ”,“ Bell-Cherry b-Plum ”,“ Bell-Plum-Cherry a ”,“ Bell-Plum-White 7 ”,“ Bell-Plum-BAR ”,“ Bell It is a combination of "-Plum-Plum", and when the transition rolls at RT0, RT2, and RT3 are aligned with the winning line LN, it shifts to RT1. In this embodiment, the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4 are won, the reels other than the reels that are the winning conditions for the middle bell are the first stop, and the winning upper bell is missed. In that case, the transition rolls are aligned with the winning line LN.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 to 27, a combination of lottery target combinations read out as lottery target combinations for each game state will be described. In this embodiment, the winning combination or the combination to be the target of the internal lottery depends on whether the gaming state is RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4, or RB (including RB in BB). At least one of the winning probabilities is different. As will be described later, a plurality of winning combinations may be read out at the same time and won in duplicate. In FIGS. 23 to 27, by notating a “+” between the winning combinations, it is shown that the winning combinations are simultaneously read as the lottery target combinations in the internal lottery. In FIGS. 23 to 25, the vertical column shows the lottery target combination, and the horizontal column shows the game state. In addition, the ○ mark in the column where the game state and the lottery target combination intersect indicates that the lottery target combination is in the game state, and the × mark is not the lottery target combination in the game state. It shows that. Further, the numerical value shown below the circle indicates the number of judgment values of the predetermined set value (common to the set value in this embodiment). An internal lottery is performed using the number of determined values. The denominator of the number of determination values is set to "65536" in correspondence with a random number (integer of 0 to 65535) for internal lottery. Therefore, for example, the winning probability of the lottery target combination in which "300" is set as the number of determination values is 300/65536. Further, FIG. 23 shows a combination of special combinations read as lottery target combinations for each game state, and FIGS. 24 and 25 show combinations of small combinations read as lottery target combinations for each game state, and FIG. , The combination of the re-game combination read out as the lottery target combination is shown.

When the game state is RT0, BB, BB + strong cherry, BB + weak cherry, BB + watermelon, BB + common bell, RB, RB + weak cherry, RB + watermelon, RB + common bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, Left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, normal replay, Replay GR11, Replay GR12, Replay GR13, Replay GR14, Replay GR15, and Replay GR16 are the targets of the internal lottery. When the game state is RT1, BB, BB + strong cherry, BB + weak cherry, BB + watermelon, BB + common bell, RB, RB + weak cherry, RB + watermelon, RB + common bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, Left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, normal replay, Replay GR1, Replay GR2, Replay GR3, Replay GR4, Replay GR5, and Replay GR6 are the targets of the internal lottery. When the game state is RT2, BB, BB + strong cherry, BB + weak cherry, BB + watermelon, BB + common bell, RB, RB + weak cherry, RB + watermelon, RB + common bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, Left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, normal replay, Replay GR21, Replay GR22, Replay GR23, Replay GR24, Replay GR25, and Replay GR26 are the targets of the internal lottery. When the game state is RT3, BB, BB + strong cherry, BB + weak cherry, BB + watermelon, BB + common bell, RB, RB + weak cherry, RB + watermelon, RB + common bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, Left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, normal replay It will be the target of the internal lottery. When the game state is RT4, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, normal replay are the targets of the internal lottery. When the game state is RB, strong cherries, weak cherries, watermelons, and common bells are the targets of the internal lottery.

The left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, the right bells 1 to 4, the common bell, the strong cherry, the weak cherry, and the watermelon are the combinations or combinations of the roles shown in FIG. 26, respectively. Hereinafter, when it is not necessary to distinguish between the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4 are simply referred to as a middle bell, and the right bells 1 to 4 are simply referred to as a right bell. There is. When it is not necessary to distinguish between the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4, they may be simply referred to as push order bells.

Normal replay, replay GR1-6, replay GR11-16, and replay GR21-26 are combinations of combinations shown in FIG. 27, respectively. Hereinafter, when it is not necessary to distinguish between replay GR1-6, replay GR11-16, and replay GR21-26, it may be simply referred to as push-order replay.

In this embodiment, when the push order bell is won, as shown in FIG. 28, the combination of the symbols to be stopped differs depending on the type of the push order bell and the stop order. For example, if the left bell 1 (middle bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 8) is won and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of the middle bells stops at the winning line LN. Then, when the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the middle reel is the first stop or the right reel is the first stop, either the combination of the upper bell 1 and the upper bell 8 or the transition result is performed. Stop at the winning line LN. The same applies to the left bells 2 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4, and as shown in FIG. 28, the combination of the symbols to be stopped differs depending on the type of the push order bell and the stop order.

Specifically, if the push order bell is won and the reel stop operation is performed as the first stop, the middle bell will win a prize, the bell symbol is stopped in the middle of the reel, and then the rest By performing the reel stop operation, the "bell" is also stopped in the middle stage of the remaining reels, and the combination of the middle stage bells is aligned with the winning line LN.

On the other hand, if the push order bell is won and the reels other than the reel on which the middle bell is to win the prize are stopped as the first stop, the first stop reel and the second stop reel are won. The constituent symbols of the upper bell (if left bell 1, "replay a" or "replay b" on the left reel, "cherry a", "cherry b" or "plum" on the middle reel, and on the right reel Either "Cherry a", "White 7", "BAR" or "Plum") can be stopped in the middle stage, and when the two reels are stopped, the winning upper bell can be stopped at the winning line LN. Situations (for left bell 1, "replay a-cherry a / cherry b-rotating", "replay a-rotating-cherry a / white 7 / BAR", "replay b-plum-rotating", "Replay b-Rotating-Plum"), and if the 3rd stop reel is stopped at the timing when the winning upper bell configuration symbol can be pulled in, it will be in the middle of the 3rd stop reel. Stop the winning upper bell configuration symbol, align the winning upper bell combination to the winning line LN, and stop the third stop reel except when the winning upper bell configuration symbol can be pulled in. If an operation is performed, the "bell" is stopped in the middle of the third stop reel, and the combination of transition rolls (if the left bell is 1, "replay a-cherry a / cherry b-bell", " Replay a-Bell-Cherry a / White 7 / BAR ”,“ Replay b-Plum-Bell ”,“ Replay b-Bell-Plum ”) are aligned with the winning line LN. In addition, when the two reels are stopped, the winning upper bell cannot be stopped at the winning line LN (if the left bell is 1, "replay b-cherry a / cherry b-rotating", " In the case of replay b-rotating-cherry a / white 7 / BAR "," replay a-plum-rotating "," replay a-rotating-plum "), the timing at which the third stop reel is stopped. Regardless, the "bell" is stopped in the middle of the 3rd stop reel, and the combination of transition rolls (in the case of left bell 1, "replay b-cherry a / cherry b-bell", "replay b-bell-" "Cherry a / White 7 / BAR", "Replay a-Plum-Bell", "Replay a-Bell-Plum") are aligned with the winning line LN. In addition, when the transition rolls are aligned with the winning line LN, the invalid line LM1 is aligned with the combinations of "bell-bell-bellless", "bell-bellless-bell", and "non-bell-bell-bell".

Therefore, when the push order bell is won, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed depending on whether or not the push order bell is operated in the stop order according to the type of the push order bell. That is, even if one of the push order bells is won, it is not possible to intentionally select the stop order according to the type unless the type is known, and if the stop order matches, the middle bell is surely won. Although you can surely get medals by letting them do, you can only get medals at a certain rate if the stop order does not match. Further, especially in RT0 and RT2, since the shift result is stopped when the stop order does not match, if the stop order does not match, the shift to RT1 will occur at a constant rate. In this embodiment, the middle bell wins at an equal rate and eight medals can be obtained regardless of the stop order in which the stop operation is performed. Therefore, the player performs the stop operation in which stop order. However, it can be prevented from becoming extremely disadvantageous.

Further, in this embodiment, the transition result can be stopped regardless of the stop order in which the stop operation is performed, and the transition is surely performed even when the stop operation is performed at any timing. There is no timing to avoid the roll, and if you do not know the type of push order bell, you cannot intentionally avoid the stop of the transition roll.

In this embodiment, when the push order bell is won, if the stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the operation mode in which the middle bell or the upper bell can be won, the transition result is always stopped. However, when the push order bell is won, if the stop operation is performed in an operation mode in which the middle bell or the upper bell cannot be won, a transition roll or a missed roll, that is, a symbol in which neither prize is won occurs. It may be a configuration in which a combination of symbols that is a combination and is not a combination of symbols that constitute a transition result is stopped.

In this embodiment, when the replays GR1 to 6 are won, as shown in FIG. 29, the combination of the symbols to be stopped differs depending on the type and the stop order. For example, if replay GR1 (middle replay + promotion replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the stop order of left, middle, and right, the combination of promotion replays stops at the winning line LN, and the stop order is other than left, middle, and right. When the stop operation is performed with, the combination of the middle replays is stopped at the winning line LN. The same applies to the replays GR2 to GR2, and as shown in FIG. 29, the combination of the symbols to be stopped differs depending on the type and the stop order. For this reason, when Replay GR1 to 6 are won in RT1, the promotion replay wins by being operated in the stop order according to the type, but if the type is not known, the stop order according to the type is intentionally selected. If the stop order matches, it is possible to shift to RT0 by winning the promotion replay, but if the stop order does not match, RT1 will be maintained. In this embodiment, the promotion replay wins at an equal rate and shifts to RT0 regardless of the stop order in which the stop operation is performed. Therefore, no matter which stop order the player performs the stop operation, it is extremely extreme. It is possible to prevent it from becoming disadvantageous.

In this embodiment, when the replays GR11 to 16 are won, as shown in FIG. 30, the combination of the symbols to be stopped differs depending on the type and the stop order. For example, if the replay GR11 (special replay + middle replay + fall replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of the middle replays stops at the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the middle reel as the first stop, the combination of special replays stops at the winning line LN, and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the right reel as the first stop. Stops the fall replay combination at the winning line LN. If the replay GR12 (special replay + middle replay + fall replay + right rising replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of the middle replay stops at the winning line LN. Then, when the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the middle reel is the first stop, the combination of the fall replays is stopped at the winning line LN, and the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the right reel is the first stop. In that case, the combination of special replays stops at the winning line LN. If Replay GR13 (Special Replay + Middle Replay + Fall Replay + Red 7 Match Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of the fall replay will be on the winning line LN. When the game is stopped and the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the middle reel is the first stop, the combination of the middle replays is stopped at the winning line LN, and the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the right reel is the first stop. If so, the combination of special replays stops at the winning line LN. If the replay GR14 (special replay + middle replay + fall replay + red 7-matched replay + right-up replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of special replays will be When the game is stopped at the winning line LN and the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the middle reel is the first stop, the combination of middle replays is stopped in the winning line LN and the right reel is the first stop in the stop order. When the stop operation is performed, the combination of fall replays stops at the winning line LN. If Replay GR15 (Special Replay + Middle Replay + Fall Replay + Blue 7 Match Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of special replays will be on the winning line LN. When the game is stopped and the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the middle reel is the first stop, the combination of the fall replays is stopped at the winning line LN, and the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the right reel is the first stop. If so, the combination of middle replays stops at the winning line LN. If the replay GR16 (special replay + middle replay + fall replay + blue 7 match replay + right rising replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of the fall replay will be If you stop at the winning line LN and perform the stop operation in the stop order with the middle reel as the first stop, the combination of special replays will stop at the winning line LN and the right reel will be the first stop in the stop order. When the stop operation is performed, the combination of the middle replays is stopped at the winning line LN.

Therefore, when the replays GR11 to 16 are won in RT0, the special replay wins by being operated in the stop order according to the type, but if the type is not known, the stop order according to the type is intentionally made. Cannot be selected, and if the operated stop order matches the stop order corresponding to the middle replay, RT0 can be maintained by winning the middle replay, which matches the stop order corresponding to the special replay. If you do so, you can move to RT2 by winning a special replay, but if the stop order corresponding to the middle replay and the stop order corresponding to the special replay do not match, the fall replay will win and move to RT1. It may end up. In this embodiment, regardless of the stop order in which the stop operation is performed, the middle replay wins at an equal rate and RT0 is maintained, the special replay wins and shifts to RT2, and the fall replay wins. Since the game shifts to RT1, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming extremely disadvantageous regardless of the stop order in which the player performs the stop operation.

Further, in this embodiment, RT0 is maintained in the case where the replays GR11 and 12 are won in RT0, the case where the replays GR13 and 14 are won in RT0, and the case where the replays GR15 and 16 are won in RT0. The stop order for winning the replay (first stop reel) and the stop order for winning the special replay that shifts to RT2 (first stop reel) are different. Further, when the replay GR11 and 12 are won in RT0, the stop order (first stop reel) for winning the middle replay in which RT0 is maintained is the same, but the stop order (first stop reel) is the same, but the replay GR12 is different from the case where the replay GR11 is won. The stop order (first stop reel) for winning the special replay that shifts to RT2 is different from the case where is won. The same applies when the replays GR13 and 14 are won at RT0 and when the replays GR15 and 16 are won at RT0. Therefore, even if the stop order for winning the middle replay in which RT0 is maintained is specified, the stop order for winning the special replay that shifts from the stop order to RT2 cannot be specified.

In this embodiment, when the replay GR21-23 is won, as shown in FIG. 30, the combination of the symbols to be stopped differs depending on the type and the stop order. For example, if the replay GR21 (red 7 match replay + red 7 missed replay + promotion replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel or the middle reel as the first stop, the red 7 match replay or If the combination of red 7 missed replays stops at the winning line LN and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the right reel as the first stop, the combination of promotion replays stops at the winning line LN. The same applies to the replays GR 22 and 23, and as shown in FIG. 30, the combination of symbols to be stopped differs depending on the type and the stop order. For this reason, when the replay GR21-23 is won in RT2, the red 7 aligned replay or the red 7 missed replay wins by operating in the stop order according to the type, but if the type is not known, the type is intentionally It is not possible to select the stop order according to, and if the stop order matches, RT2 can be maintained by winning the red 7 aligned replay or the red 7 missed replay, but if the stop order does not match The promotion replay may win a prize and shift to RT0. In this embodiment, the player stops in which stop order because the red 7 aligned replay or the red 7 missed replay wins and maintains RT2 regardless of which stop order is performed. Even if the operation is performed, it can be prevented from becoming extremely disadvantageous.

In this embodiment, when the replays GR24 to 26 are won, as shown in FIG. 30, the combination of the symbols to be stopped differs depending on the type and the stop order. For example, if the replay GR24 (blue 7 match replay + blue 7 missed replay + promotion replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel or the middle reel as the first stop, the blue 7 match replay or If the blue 7 missed replay combination stops at the winning line LN and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the right reel as the first stop, the promotion replay combination stops at the winning line LN. The same applies to the replays GR 25 and 26, and as shown in FIG. 30, the combination of symbols to be stopped differs depending on the type and the stop order. For this reason, when Replay GR24-26 is won in RT2, Blue 7 aligned replay or Blue 7 missed replay wins by operating in the stop order according to the type, but if you do not know the type, that type is intentionally It is not possible to select the stop order according to, and if the stop order matches, RT2 can be maintained by winning the blue 7 aligned replay or the blue 7 missed replay, but if the stop order does not match The promotion replay may win a prize and shift to RT0. In this embodiment, the player stops in which stop order in order to maintain RT2 by winning the blue 7 aligned replay or the blue 7 missed replay at an equal ratio regardless of which stop order is performed. Even if the operation is performed, it can be prevented from becoming extremely disadvantageous.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, RT0 to 4 and a bonus (RB, RB in BB) are controlled. RT0 shifts by winning a promotion replay in RT1 and RT2. Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT0, RT0 shifts to RT1 by winning a fall replay or stopping the transition roll, or shifts to RT2 by winning a special replay, or a special role is won. Then, it ends by shifting to RT4. The medal payout rate per game exceeds 100% when the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification, while it becomes 100% or less when the navigation notification is not executed. RT1 shifts at RT0, RT2, and RT3 by winning a fall replay or stopping the shift roll. Then, RT1 ends by shifting to RT0 by winning a promotion replay or shifting to RT4 by winning a special role, regardless of the number of games after shifting to RT1. The medal payout rate per game is less than 100%. RT2 shifts at RT0 by winning a special replay. Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT2, RT2 shifts to RT0 by winning a promotion replay, shifts to RT1 by stopping the transition roll, or shifts to RT4 by winning a special role. It ends with. The medal payout rate per game exceeds 100% when the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification, while it becomes 100% or less when the navigation notification is not executed. RT3 transitions at the end of the bonus (BB, RB). Then, regardless of the number of games after the transition to RT3, RT3 ends by shifting to RT1 by stopping the transition roll or by shifting to RT4 by winning a special role. The medal payout rate per game is less than 100%. RT4 shifts by winning a special role (BB, RB) in RT0-3. Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT4, the RT4 ends when the special role that triggered the transition to RT4 wins a prize and shifts to a bonus (BB or RB). The medal payout rate per game is less than 100% regardless of whether the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification or the navigation notification is not executed. RB shifts by winning RB at RT4. Then, the RB ends when 12 games are digested or 6 times are won. The medal payout rate per game exceeds 100%. BB shifts by winning BB at RT4. Then, the BB ends when the total number of medals paid out during the BB exceeds the specified number (316 in this embodiment) regardless of the number of games after the transition to the BB. The medal payout rate per game exceeds 100%.

Among RT0-4, RB, and BB (RB), RB and BB have the highest medal payout rate per game, and are the most advantageous gaming states. Further, among RTs 0 to 4, RTs 0, 2 and 4 have a higher probability of winning the replaying combination, and the medal payout rate per game is higher than that of RT1 and RT3. It can be said that it is an advantageous state for the player. Further, among RT0, 2 and 4, RT0 and 2 can be said to be more advantageous to the player than RT4 in that the payout rate of medals per game is higher than that of RT4. Further, it can be said that RT2 is more advantageous to the player than RT0 in that the number of ART games described later is likely to be added.

Further, in the slot machine of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is RT0 to 2, the main control unit 41 can execute the navigation notification that notifies the player in the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result. It is possible to control the assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT), which is the notification period.

When the main control unit 41 is controlled by the AT, the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification by winning the notification target combination according to the game state, and the sub control unit 91 receives the first internal winning command. , The second internal winning command and the push order command are transmitted to execute the navigation effect by the sub control unit 91. The notification target combinations according to the game state are replay GR1 to 6 and push order bells when RT1, replay GR11 to 16 and push order bells when RT0, and replay GR21 to 26 when RT2. It is a push order bell. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes navigation notification by satisfying certain conditions even in a normal state (RT1 and non-AT state) in which neither AT nor ART is controlled. , It is possible to execute a navigation effect. In the navigation notification of this embodiment, the stop order advantageous to the player is identifiable by changing the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. The mode of navigation notification will be described in detail later.

In the navigation effect of this embodiment, the stop order advantageous to the player notified by the navigation notification is notified by the display of the navigation image from the liquid crystal display 51 and the output of the navigation voice from the speakers 53 and 54. For example, when notifying the stop order of left middle right, a stop switch 8L such as "123" (indicating that the left reel is the first stop, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop). A stop order image showing the stop order of 8C and 8R is displayed. Further, as the navigation voice, for example, a voice indicating the stop order of the stop switch such as "left middle right!" (Indicating that the left reel is the first stop, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop). Is output. Further, when notifying the stop order in which the left reel is the first stop, the stop order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R such as "1--" (indicating that the left reel is the first stop) is indicated. Display stop order images. Further, as the navigation voice, for example, a voice indicating the stop order of the stop switch such as "left!" (Indicating that the left reel is the first stop) (indicating that the left reel is the first stop) is output. To do. In particular, when the replay GR21-26 is won in RT2 and the stop order in which the red 7-matched replay, the red 7-missed replay or the blue 7-matched replay, and the blue 7 missed replay win is notified, the above-mentioned stop order image In addition, an image prompting the stop operation at the timing of aiming at the red 7 and the blue 7 is also displayed on each reel, and the stop operation at that timing is prompted. The mode of the navigation effect is not limited to such a mode, and may be any mode as long as the player can distinguish it according to the winning situation. Further, the navigation effect is not limited to the one using the liquid crystal display 51, the speakers 53, 54, and may be executed by using the effect effect LED 52, the reel LED 55, or the like.

In the navigation notification and the navigation effect, when any of the replays GR1 to 6 is won in RT1, the stop order in which the promotion replay wins is identifiable. Further, when any of the replays GR11 to 16 is won in RT0, the stop order in which the middle replay or the special replay wins is identifiablely notified. Further, when any of the replays GR21 to 23 is won in RT2 and the number of guaranteed games to be described later remains, the stop order in which the red 7-matched replay and the red 7 missed replay win is identifiable. Further, when any of the replays GR24 to 26 is won in RT2 and the number of guaranteed games to be described later remains, the stop order in which the blue 7-matched replay and the blue 7 missed replay win is identifiable.

As described above, in the navigation notification and the navigation effect, the stop order that is advantageous for the player is notified in an identifiable manner. Therefore, the player can intentionally win the promotion replay in RT1 and shift to RT0 by performing the stop operation in the stop order according to the navigation effect, and can win the middle bell, and in RT0. It is possible to win the middle replay and maintain RT0, win the special replay and shift to RT2, avoid the fall replay winning, win the middle bell, and avoid the stop of the transition roll. You can, in RT2, you can win the Red 7 Match Replay, Red 7 Missed Replay, Blue 7 Matched Replay, Blue 7 Missed Replay to maintain RT2, win the middle bell, and avoid the stoppage of the transition roll. it can.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls ART (a state controlled by AT at RT0) when the lottery condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, and common bell are won). An ART lottery will be held to determine whether or not. Further, the main control unit 41 can control the precursor period to suggest the possibility of winning the ART lottery over a predetermined period (number of games), and determines the length of the precursor period according to the result of the ART lottery. A lottery will be held for the precursory period. Then, the main control unit 41 wins the ART lottery and controls the ART when the precursor period determined by the precursor period lottery elapses.

When controlling to ART, first control to AT. The state from the start of AT control to the transition to RT0 is also called the preparation state. The main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification when the target combination is won in the ready state. At this time, in RT1, the navigation notification is applied when the replays GR1 to 6 are won, and the stop order for winning the promotion replay is notified by the navigation notification when the replays GR1 to 6 are won. Therefore, the operation is stopped according to the notified stop order. By performing the operation, it is possible to win the promotion replay and shift from RT1 to RT0. In addition, after shifting to the ready state, the stop order for winning the middle bell is notified when the push order bell is won, so by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order, eight medals are surely obtained. It becomes possible.

The main control unit 41 ends the preparation state when the promotion replay wins in RT1, and starts controlling the ART. Along with this, the main control unit 41 sets a predetermined number of games as the number of remaining games of ART assigned to the RAM 91c, and starts counting the number of remaining games of ART. After the start of ART, the stop order for winning the middle bell will be notified when the push order bell is won, so it is possible to reliably win eight medals by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order. At the same time, it is possible to avoid the stoppage of the transition roll and the winning of the fall replay, and it is possible to avoid the transition to RT1. In addition, if the additional state lottery described later is not won, the stop order for winning the middle replay is notified by the navigation notification when the replay GR11 to 16 is won, so the stop operation should be performed according to the notified stop order. This makes it possible to win the middle replay and maintain RT0.

Further, after the start of ART, the number of remaining games is subtracted by 1 each time one game is exhausted, and when the number of remaining games becomes 0, the control of AT is terminated. Along with this, the navigation notification will not be executed, so it will be impossible to avoid the stop of the transition roll when the push order bell is won, and it will be impossible to avoid the fall replay winning when the replay GR11 to 16 is won, and the transition roll. A series of AT and ART control will be completed by shifting to RT1 by stopping or winning a fall replay.

In addition, after the start of ART, if the lottery conditions (watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, common bell winning) are satisfied before the number of remaining games becomes 0, it is decided whether or not to add the number of ART games. An additional lottery will be held. Then, when the additional lottery is won, the ART game number lottery for determining the number of ART games is performed, and the number of games won in the ART game number lottery is added to the remaining number of ART games.

In addition, after the start of ART, if the lottery condition (winning of strong cherry) is satisfied before the number of remaining games becomes 0, the probability that the number of ART games will be added is higher than during ART. An additional state lottery is held to determine whether or not. Then, when the additional state lottery is won, the stop order for winning the special replay is notified by the navigation notification when the replay GR11 to 16 is won, and the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop order. It is possible to win a special replay and shift to RT2.

If the game shifts to RT2 due to winning the additional state lottery, ART is interrupted, and the counting of the number of ART games is also interrupted accordingly, and the additional state is shifted. The additional state continues until the promotion replay wins or the transition roll stops, and during that time, the number of ART games is drawn every time one of the roles wins, and the number of games won in the ART game number lottery is calculated. Add to the number of remaining games in ART. In particular, when Red 7 Replay or Red 7 Missed Replay wins, the average number of games won in the ART game number lottery is set to be higher than when other roles win, and Blue 7 Replay or Blue 7 When the missed replay wins, the average number of games won in the ART game number lottery is set to be higher than when the red 7 replay or the red 7 missed replay wins.

In the additional state, until the guaranteed number of games is reached, the stop order for winning the red 7 replay or the red 7 missed replay when the replay GR21-23 is won is notified by the navigation notification, and the blue 7 replay or the blue 7 replay when the replay GR24 to 26 is won Blue 7 Since the stop order for winning the missed replay is notified by the navigation notification, the end of RT2 due to the promotion replay winning, that is, the end of the additional state is avoided by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order, and red 7 replays, red 7 missed replays, blue 7 replays or blue 7 missed replays can be won to add more games to the remaining ART games than when other roles were won. In addition, after the guaranteed number of games is reached, the navigation notification will not be executed when the replay GR21-26 is won, so it becomes impossible to avoid the promotion replay winning when the replay GR21-26 is won, and the promotion replay winning. By shifting to RT0, the additional state ends, and the counting of ART and the number of ART games is restarted.

In addition, in the added state, the stop order for winning the middle bell is notified when the push order bell is won, regardless of whether or not the guaranteed number of games has been reached. It is possible to surely obtain eight medals, avoid the stoppage of the transition roll, and avoid the transition to RT1.

Further, if the special combination is won after the start of ART and before the number of remaining games becomes 0, ART is interrupted by the end of RT2, and the counting of the number of ART games is also interrupted accordingly. When a special role is won during ART, the navigation notification is not sent even if the push order bell is won until the special role is won.

If a special role is won during ART and ART is interrupted, then the winning special role is won and the corresponding bonus is controlled, and the transition roll is stopped at RT3, which shifts after the bonus ends, and RT1 At the time of transition to, AT control is resumed, and along with this, ART is restarted by shifting to RT0 again after a preparatory state, and counting of the number of remaining games in ART is also restarted.

Further, the main control unit 41 notifies the stop order in which the middle bell wins by the navigation notification when the push order bell is won during ART or in the additional state, and ignores the notified stop order. When the stop operation is performed, the upper bell may win and RT0 or RT2 may be maintained, but the transition result may be stopped and the transition to RT1 may occur. If the game shifts from RT0 or RT2 to RT1 during ART or in the additional state, the additional state ends, but ART continues, and the remaining number of games in ART is subtracted by 1 each time one game is consumed, and the preparation state is established. Similarly, when the replays GR1 to GR1 in RT1 are won, the stop order for winning the promotion replay is notified by the navigation notification, and the promotion replay is won by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order, and the promotion replay is won from RT1 to RT0. It is possible to migrate.

In this embodiment, when the middle stage replay that maintains RT0 and the special replay that shifts to RT2, which is more advantageous to the player than RT0, are won at the same time, the stop order in which the middle stage replay wins and the stop in which the special replay wins are won. The order and the stop order are different, and if the additional state lottery is not won, the stop order in which the middle replay wins is notified by the navigation notification, and the stop operation in the notified stop order is promoted, and RT0 Is designed to be maintained.

In such a configuration, even if the stop order for maintaining RT0 is notified by the navigation notification, there is a possibility that the stop order for shifting from the notified stop order to RT2 can be specified, and the stop for maintaining RT0 is stopped. Despite notifying the order, there was a risk that the operation would be performed in the stop order of intentionally shifting to RT2.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, RT0 is maintained when the replays GR11 and 12 are won at RT0, when the replays GR13 and 14 are won at RT0, and when the replays GR15 and 16 are won at RT0. The stop order for winning the middle stage replay and the stop order for winning the special replay that shifts to RT2 are different, and when the replays GR11 and 12 are won at RT0, the stop order for winning the middle stage replay where RT0 is maintained is also different. The order is the same, but the stop order for winning the special replay that shifts to RT2 is different depending on whether the replay GR11 is won or the replay GR12 is won, and if the replays GR13 and 14 are won at RT0, RT0 The same applies when the replays GR15 and 16 are won. For this reason, even if the stop order for winning the middle replay in which RT0 is maintained is specified by the navigation notification, the stop order for winning the special replay that shifts from the stop order to RT2 cannot be specified. Therefore, when the stop order for maintaining RT0 is notified, it is possible to prevent the stop order for shifting to RT2 from being specified.

Further, in this embodiment, when the replays GR11 and 12 are won in RT0, the stop order for winning the middle replay in which RT0 is maintained is the same, but the replay GR12 is different from the case where the replay GR11 is won. Not only is the stop order for winning the special replay that shifts to RT2 different from that of winning, but if it does not match the stop order for winning the special replay, the fall replay wins and is more disadvantageous to the player than RT0. The same applies when the replays GR13 and 14 are won at RT0 and when the replays GR15 and 16 are won at RT0. Therefore, by specifying the stop order for winning the middle replay in which RT0 is maintained by the navigation notification, even if the stop order for winning the special replay is narrowed down, the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the notified stop order. Since this may cause a disadvantage to the player, it is possible to urge the player to stop the operation in the notified stop order.

In this embodiment, the reel stop order is applied as an operation mode for winning the middle stage replay in which RT0 is maintained when the replays GR11 to 16 are won, and an operation mode for winning the special replay that shifts to RT2. , The timing of the stop operation may be applied, or the combination of the stop order and the timing of the stop operation may be applied.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the operation mode in which the middle stage replay in which RT0 is maintained at the time of winning the replay GR11 to 16 is won, and the operation mode in which the special replay that shifts to RT2 is won. In addition, the fall replay wins and shifts to RT1 which is more disadvantageous to the player than RT0, but the operation mode to win the middle replay where RT0 is maintained when the replays GR11 to 16 are won, the special shift to RT2 When the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the operation mode for winning the replay, at least the display result other than the display result in which the special replay that shifts to RT2 wins is stopped. For example, the middle replay wins the prize. The display result may be stopped.

Further, in this embodiment, when the replays GR11 and 12 having the same operation mode for winning the middle replay are won, the operation mode for winning the special replay is the operation mode for winning the middle replay as compared with the operation mode for winning the replay GR11 and 12. It is the same as a part of the operation mode for winning the special replay in different replays GR13 to 16, but the operation mode for winning the middle replay is different from that when the replays GR11 and 12 are won. The configuration may be different from the operation mode. Further, when the replays GR13 and 14 having the same operation mode for winning the middle stage replay are won, the operation mode for winning the special replay is different from the operation mode for winning the middle stage replay when the replay GR13 and 14 are won. , 15 and 16 are the same as a part of the operation mode for winning the special replay, but the operation mode for winning the middle replay is different from that at the time of winning the replay GR13 and 14, and the special replay is different in the replay GR11, 12, 15 and 16. The configuration may be different from the operation mode for winning a prize. Further, when the replays GR15 and 16 having the same operation mode for winning the middle stage replay are won, the operation mode for winning the special replay is different from the operation mode for winning the middle stage replay when the replay GR15 and 16 are won. It is the same as a part of the operation mode for winning the special replay in the above, but the operation mode for winning the middle replay is different from the operation mode for winning the special replay in the replays GR15 and GR16. It may be.

Further, RT2 is more advantageous to the player than RT0 in that the number of ART games is likely to be added, that is, it is advantageous to the player in that a privilege advantageous to the player is likely to be given. However, the configuration may be advantageous for the player in that, for example, the probability of winning a specific combination is high, the probability of winning a specific combination is high, and the payout rate of medals is high.

Here, the advantageous privilege for the player is the right to be able to shift to the advantageous state for the player (winning the lottery to determine whether or not the advantageous state occurs, shifting to the advantageous state). The right to be notified of the operation mode that is advantageous to the player, the right to be controlled to a game state with a high expected value to which the game value is given, the current game state is advantageous to the player. It is a directly advantageous privilege for the player, such as the right to be notified whether or not the game is in a good game state, the period controlled to the advantageous state (fixed number of games, average value of the number of games that fluctuates depending on the end condition, etc.). It may be a privilege that is not directly advantageous to the player, but may be a privilege that is indirectly advantageous to the player, for example, as a condition for obtaining the privilege on the Internet.

Further, in this embodiment, in RT0, the display result of maintaining RT0, the display result of shifting to RT2, and the display result of shifting to RT1 all apply the display result in which the re-game combination wins. The display result may be a display result in which a small winning combination wins, or a display result in which no winning combination is won.

Next, the control content of the internal winning command transmission process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 36.

In this embodiment, a winning number is assigned in advance for each type of lottery target combination, and a lottery target combination that may be carried over, that is, a special combination winning number table in which a winning number for each type of special combination is set. A lottery target combination that is not carried over, that is, a general combination winning number table in which a winning number for each type of general combination is set is stored in a predetermined area of ROM 41b.

As shown in FIG. 31, in the special winning combination number table, when none of the special winning combination is won, that is, the winning number of the outlier is "0", and the winning number of BB is "1", which is RB. The winning number is assigned "1".

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, in the general winning combination winning number table, "0" is used as the winning number when none of the general winning combination is won, that is, when the winning number is out of the game, and the winning number of the normal replay is "1". However, the winning number of the replay GR1 is "2", the winning number of the replay GR2 is "3", the winning number of the replay GR3 is "4", and the winning number of the replay GR4 is "5". , The winning number of replay GR5 is "6", the winning number of replay GR6 is "7", the winning number of replay GR11 is "8", and the winning number of replay GR12 is "9". The winning number of GR13 is "10", the winning number of replay GR14 is "11", the winning number of replay GR15 is "12", and the winning number of replay GR16 is "13". The winning number is "14", the winning number of the replay GR22 is "15", the winning number of the replay GR23 is "16", the winning number of the replay GR24 is "17", and the winning number of the replay GR25. Is assigned "18", and the winning number of the replay GR26 is assigned "19". The winning number of the strong cherry is "20", the winning number of the weak cherry is "21", and the winning number of the watermelon is "22". The winning number of the left bell 1 is "23", the winning number of the left bell 2 is "24", the winning number of the left bell 3 is "25", and the winning number of the left bell 4 is "". "26", the winning number of the middle bell 1 is "27", the winning number of the middle bell 2 is "28", the winning number of the middle bell 3 is "29", and the winning number of the middle bell 4 is "29". , "30", the winning number of the right bell 1 is "31", the winning number of the right bell 2 is "32", the winning number of the right bell 3 is "33", the winning number of the right bell 4 The number is assigned "34", and the winning number of the common bell is assigned "35".

As described above, in the special winning combination winning number table and the general winning combination winning number table, the lottery target combination of the internal lottery and the winning number are set correspondingly.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes the internal lottery process when the start operation is performed, and when any of the special combination and the general combination is won in the internal lottery, , The winning number corresponding to the lottery target combination for which the winning is determined is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and if none of the winning combinations are won, the winning number corresponding to the loss is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The winning number indicating the winning of the general role is cleared after each game, while the winning number indicating the winning of the special role is maintained until the winning special role is won, and the winning special role wins. It will be cleared.

After setting the winning number, the main control unit 41 executes the internal winning command setting process, and the first internal winning command and the second internal winning are based on the internal winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The command is set in the command queue, and the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the subsequent timer interrupt processing (main).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, in the internal winning command setting process, first, in the internal lottery process, the winning number of the special combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired (Sf1), and the acquired winning number is obtained. , The transmission winning number to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf2), and the first internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number. The command transmitted by the main control unit 41 is composed of two bytes, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command content). When the first internal winning command is stored in the command queue, 41 stores a MODE indicating that the first internal winning command is the first internal winning command in the first byte, and the EXT in the second byte is won for transmission of a special role. Store the number.

In the step of Sf3, after storing the first internal winning command, the winning number of the general winning combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in the internal lottery process (Sf4), and the acquired winning number is less than 2. Winning obtained by sequentially determining whether or not there is (Sf5), whether or not it is less than 20 (Sf6), whether or not it is less than 23 (Sf7), and whether or not it is less than 35 (Sf8). It is determined which of the plurality of predetermined ranges the number is in.

Then, when it is determined in the step of Sf5 that the winning number is less than 2, that is, when the winning number is 0 or 1, the acquired winning number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 for transmission winning. The number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf9). Further, when it is determined that the winning number is not less than 2 in the step of Sf5 and less than 20 in the step of Sf6, that is, when the winning number is any of 2 to 19, it is used as the winning number for transmission. 2 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf10). Further, when it is determined that the winning number is not less than 20 in the step of Sf6 and it is determined that the winning number is less than 23 in the step of Sf7, that is, when the winning number is any of 20 to 22, the winning number is assigned. The transmission winning number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf9). Further, when it is determined that the winning number is not less than 23 in the step of Sf7 and less than 35 in the step of Sf8, that is, when the winning number is any of 23 to 34, it is used as the winning number for transmission. 23 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf10). If it is determined in the step of Sf8 that the winning number is not less than 35, that is, if the winning number is 35, the winning number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the transmitting winning number (Sf9).

Then, after the transmission winning number of the general combination is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the steps of Sf9, Sf10, and Sf11, the second internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number. When the main control unit 41 stores the second internal winning command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores a MODE indicating that the second internal winning command is the second internal winning command in the first byte, and serves as a general role in the EXT of the second byte. Stores the winning number for transmission.

After storing the second internal winning command in the command queue in the step of Sf10, the internal winning command setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (main).

As described above, in the internal winning command setting process of this embodiment, the winning number of the special combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is set as the transmitting winning number, and the first winning number including the transmitting winning number is set. Set the internal winning command of to the command queue.

Further, in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment, the winning number of the general winning combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is within the first predetermined range (0 to 1, 20 to 22, 35). In this case, the winning number is set as the transmission winning number, and the second internal winning command including the transmission winning number is set in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command, which is transmitted when the winning number within the first predetermined range (0 to 1, 20 to 22, 35) is set in the internal winning, the command is used. The winning number by the internal lottery can be specified based on the included sending winning number.

On the other hand, when the winning number is within the second predetermined range (2 to 19), one winning number (2) included in the second predetermined range is set as the transmission winning number, and the transmission winning is set. Set the second internal winning command, including the number, in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command, which is transmitted when the winning number within the second predetermined range (2 to 19) is set in the internal winning, the transmission winning number included in the command is transmitted. It is not possible to specify which of the numbers in the second predetermined range (2 to 19) the winning number is based on the above, while the winning number is within the second predetermined range (2 to 19). It is possible to identify something.

If the winning number is within the third predetermined range (23 to 34), one winning number (23) included in the third predetermined range is set as the transmission winning number, and the transmission winning number is set. Set the second internal winning command, including the number, in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command, which is transmitted when the winning number within the third predetermined range (23 to 34) is set in the internal winning, the transmission winning number included in the command is transmitted. It is not possible to specify which of the numbers in the third predetermined range (23 to 34) the winning number is based on, while the winning number is within the third predetermined range (23 to 34). It is possible to identify something.

The first internal winning command and the second internal winning command set in the internal winning command setting process of this embodiment are subsequently executed by the timer interrupt processing (main) to the sub-control unit 91. Will be transmitted sequentially.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to transmit a command composed of 2 bytes to the sub control unit 91, but the form of the command shown in this embodiment is an example and other data. The form may be used. Further, in this embodiment, the command is composed of a 2-byte signal, but these commands may be composed of a 1-byte signal or a 3-byte or more signal.

Further, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment has a configuration in which a first internal winning command and a second internal winning command composed of 2 bytes are transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and 2 of each command. Although the configuration includes the winning number for transmission in the byte, the form of the command shown in this embodiment is an example, and other data forms may be used. For example, the first internal winning command and the second internal Each winning command is composed of a 3-byte signal, and the 3rd byte includes the special winning transmission winning number or the general winning transmission winning number, the first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command. It may be composed of one signal consisting of 3 bytes, the 2nd byte may include the winning number for transmission of the special combination, and the 3rd byte may include the winning number for transmission of the general combination.

In this embodiment, the winning numbers of the special winning combination and the general winning combination are assigned separately, that is, the winning numbers of the special winning combination corresponding to the types and deviations of the special winning combination (BB, RB) in the special winning combination winning number table are assigned. It is configured to set and set the winning number of the general winning combination according to the type of the general winning combination and the loss in the general winning combination winning number table, and the main control unit 41 sets the winning number of the special winning combination and the general winning combination according to the result of the internal lottery. The winning number of the winning combination is set in each predetermined area of the RAM 41c, but the winning number is assigned without dividing the special winning combination and the general winning combination, for example, "BB", "small winning combination", and "BB + winning at the same time". A winning number may be assigned to each of the "small winning combination (for example, BB + strong cherry shown in FIG. 23)" as the winning combination. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 sets one winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c according to the result of the internal lottery, so that the special winning combination and the small winning combination are won based only on the one winning number. It is possible to determine whether or not the reels are being used, and perform predetermined control (setting of internal winning flag, navigation notification, command creation, stop control of reels 2L, 2C, 2R, etc.).

Next, the control content of the push order command transmission process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32, 34, and 35.

In this embodiment, navigation numbers (0 to 9) that can identify the reel stop order by navigation notification are assigned in advance, and among the lottery target combinations, the notification target combination is assigned a navigation number in advance for each type. , A navigation number table in which navigation numbers for each type of lottery target combination are set is stored in a predetermined area of ROM 41b.

As shown in FIG. 34, the navigation numbers are 0, which indicates the standard push order (in this embodiment, the stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop), and the stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop, that is, the left first. 1 Indicates the stop order with the middle reel 2C as the first stop, that is, the middle first stop 2. The stop order with the right reel 2R as the first stop, that is, the right first stop 3, 1st stop Left reel 2L, 2nd stop is middle reel 2C, 3rd stop is right reel 2R 4, showing stop order 4, 1st stop is left reel 2L, 2nd stop is right reel 2R, 3rd stop is middle reel 2C 5. Indicates the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 2C, the second stop is the left reel 2L, and the third stop is the right reel 2R. 6, The first stop is the middle reel 2C, and the second stop. Indicates the stop order in which the right reel 2R and the third stop are the left reel 2L, the first stop is the right reel 2L, the second stop is the left reel 2L, and the third stop is the middle reel 2C. , 9 indicating a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 2R, the second stop is the middle reel 2C, and the third stop is the left reel 2L is set.

In this embodiment, the stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop is applied as the standard push order specified by the navigation number 0, but the standard push order is disadvantageously advantageous for the player. Can be another stop order as long as it is a standard push order.

As shown in FIG. 32, in the navigation number table, navigation numbers are set for each type of the notification target combination among the lottery target combinations, and the left bell 1, the left bell 2, the left bell 3, and the left bell 4 are set. "1" is for middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, and "2" is for right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, and right bell 4. Is set, "4" for replay GR1, "5" for replay GR2, "6" for replay GR3, "7" for replay GR4, and "7" for replay GR5. “8” is set, and “9” is set for the replay GR6.

Further, for replay GR11 to 16, the navigation number is set according to the winning status of the above-mentioned additional lottery, and if the additional lottery is not won, the navigation number 1 is set for the replay GR11 and the replay GR12. , Navi number 2 is set for replay GR13 and replay GR14, and navigation number 3 is set for replay GR15 and replay GR16. If the additional lottery is won, the navigation number is set for replay GR11 and replay GR16. 2. The navigation number 3 is set for the replay GR12 and the replay GR13, and the navigation number 1 is set for the replay GR14 and the replay GR15. Further, navigation numbers 1 and 2 are set for the replay GR21 and the replay GR24, navigation numbers 1 and 3 are set for the replay GR22 and the replay GR25, and navigation numbers 2 and 3 are set for the replay GR23 and the replay GR26. ..

Note that navigation numbers are not set for normal replays, strong cherries, weak cherries, watermelons, and common bells, which are not the roles to be notified among the lottery target roles.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 wins a general combination set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the start operation is performed and when the stop operations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are performed. The push order command setting process for setting the push order command according to the number in the command queue is executed, and the push order command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 by the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, in the push order command setting process, first, in the internal lottery process, after acquiring the winning number of the general winning combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sg1), the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is obtained. Whether or not the navigation notification is performed (when the navigation notification is performed during AT or non-AT) with reference to a predetermined flag indicating whether or not the navigation notification is set to. Is determined (Sg2). If it is determined in the step of Sg2 that the navigation notification is not performed, whether or not the winning combination to stop at the winning line LN is determined based on the stop status of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R and the result of the internal lottery. (Sg5), and if the winning combination to stop at the winning line LN is not determined, the standard navigation number (0 in this embodiment) is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the transmission navigation number (Sg6).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of Sg2 that the navigation notification is performed, and when it is determined in the step of Sg5 that the winning combination to stop at the winning line LN is confirmed, it is stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 41b. With reference to the navigation number table (see FIG. 32), the navigation number corresponding to the winning number of the general winning combination acquired in the step of Sg1 is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the transmission navigation number.

At this time, if it is specified that the replays GR1 to 6 have been won based on the internal winning number, the stop order in which the combination of promotion replays is stopped at the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination is set. Set the indicated navigation number as the transmission navigation number. In addition, when it is specified that the replays GR11 to 16 have been won and that the additional lottery has not been won, the combination of the middle replays is set to the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination. Set the navigation number indicating the stop order to be stopped as the transmission navigation number. In addition, when it is specified that the replays GR11 to 16 have been won and that the additional lottery has been won, the combination of special replays is added to the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination. Set the navigation number indicating the stop order to be stopped as the transmission navigation number.

If it is specified that Replay GR21-26 has been won, one of Red 7 Matched Replay, Red 7 Missed Replay, Blue 7 Matched Replay, and Blue 7 Missed Replay, depending on the type of winning combination. A navigation number indicating the stop order in which the combination of the above can be stopped on the winning line LN is set as the transmission navigation number. In this embodiment, two navigation numbers are set for the navigation numbers corresponding to the replay GR21 to 26 in the navigation number table, but the main control unit 41 is one of the navigation numbers selected by lottery. Set the navigation number as the transmission navigation number.

If it is specified that the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4 have been won based on the internal winning numbers, the middle bells are selected according to the type of winning combination. A navigation number indicating the stop order in which the combination is stopped on the winning line LN is set as the transmission navigation number.

After the transmission navigation number is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the step of Sg3 or the step of Sg6, the push order command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission navigation number (Sg4). When the push order command is stored in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores a MODE indicating that the push order command is in the first byte, and stores a transmission navigation number in the EXT of the second byte.

After the push order command is stored in the command queue in the step of Sg4, the push order command setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (main).

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the push order command setting process when the start operation is performed, which is advantageous for the player when the navigation notification is being executed. If a push order command that can specify the stop order is set in the command queue and the navigation notification is not being executed, the stop order that is advantageous to the player cannot be specified, and the standard is disadvantageous or advantageous to the player. Set a push order command that can specify a specific push order in the command queue.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the push order command setting process every time the stop operation is performed, so that the main control unit 41 stops at the winning line LN even when the navigation notification is not being executed. If is confirmed, a push order command that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player is set in the command queue.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is a case where the replay GR1 is won in a state where the game state is RT1 and the navigation notification is not performed by executing the push order command setting process. , When neither reel 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, promotion replay and middle stage replay can be stopped, but since it is not certain which role will be stopped, the standard navigation number ("0") Is set as the transmission navigation number, and the push order command including the transmission navigation number is set. In addition, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, the promotion replay and the middle stage replay can still be stopped, and it has not been determined which combination will be stopped, so the standard navigation number ("" A push order command including 0 ") is set. Then, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop and then the middle reel 2C is stopped as the second stop, only the promotion replay can be stopped by the subsequent stop of the right reel 2R, and the winning combination to be stopped is confirmed. Therefore, even if the navigation notification is not performed, the navigation number (“4”) that can specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player (the stop order that wins the promotion replay) is used as the transmission navigation number. Set. Further, when the reels other than the left reel 2L are stopped in the first stop, the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, and then the reels other than the middle reel 2C are stopped as the second stop. Regardless of the order, only the middle replay can be stopped and the winning combination is fixed, so even if the navigation notification is not performed, the navigation number that can specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player ("" 4 ”) is set as the transmission navigation number.

Further, even when the replay GR2 to 6 are won in the state where the game state is RT1 and the navigation notification is not performed, either the promotion replay or the middle replay role is played in the same manner as when the replay GR1 is won. When it is not decided whether to stop, a push order command including the standard navigation number ("0") is set, and it is advantageous for the player when it is decided whether the promotion replay or the middle replay will be stopped. Push order commands including navigation numbers that can specify the stop order are set.

Further, for example, when the game state is RT0, the replay GR11 is won in a state where the navigation notification is not performed, and neither reel 2L, 2C, or 2R is stopped, the middle stage replay, the special replay, Although the fall replay can be stopped, it is not certain which combination will be stopped, so a standard navigation number ("0") that cannot specify the stop order of the replay GR11 is set as the transmission navigation number. , The push order command including the transmission navigation number will be set. Then, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, only the middle stage replay can be stopped, and the winning combination is determined. Therefore, even if the navigation notification is not performed, the stop is advantageous for the player. A navigation number (“2”) that can specify the order (stop order for winning a special replay) is set as a transmission navigation number. Further, when the middle reel 2C is stopped as the first stop, it is confirmed that only the special replay is stopped, so that the navigation number (“2”) that can specify the stop order advantageous to the player is used for transmission. It is set as a navigation number, and when the right reel 2R is stopped as the first stop, it is confirmed that only the fall replay will stop, so the navigation number ("2") that can specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player. ) Is set as the navigation number for transmission.

Further, even when the replay GR12 to 16 are won in the state where the game state is RT0 and the navigation notification is not performed, any of the middle replay, the special replay, and the fall replay is performed in the same manner as when the replay GR11 is won. When the push order command including the standard navigation number ("0") is set and it is decided whether the middle replay, the special replay, or the fall replay will stop. In addition, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order (stop order for winning a special replay) that is advantageous for the player is set.

Also, when the game state is RT2 and the navigation notification is not performed and the replays GR21 to 26 are won, the red 7 matching replay and the red 7 are missed in the same manner as when the replays GR1 to 6 are won. When it is uncertain which of the replay, blue 7 match replay, blue 7 missed replay, and promotion replay will stop, a push order command including the standard navigation number ("0") is set, and which role is A navigation number that can specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player (red 7 match replay, red 7 missed replay, blue 7 match replay, blue 7 missed replay) when it is decided whether to stop. Push order commands including are set.

Also, when the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4 are won without the navigation notification being performed, the same as when the replay GR1 to 6 and the replay GR21 to 26 are won. Then, when it is uncertain which combination of the middle bell and the upper bells 1 to 8 is stopped, a push order command including the standard navigation number ("0") is set, and which combination is stopped. When is confirmed, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order (stop order for winning the middle bell) that is advantageous to the player is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notification target combination is elected in the state where the main control unit 41 is not controlling the AT, the stop order advantageous to the player is determined for the player. A push order command including a navigation number capable of specifying an advantageous stop order is set and transmitted to the sub control unit 91. The timing at which the advantageous stop order is determined is the timing at which the first stop operation is performed in the three-choice combination (replay GR11-16 and replay GR21-26 among the push order replays), and the six-choice combination ( In the replay GR1 to 6), it is the timing when the first stop operation is performed and it is determined that the winning combination for the player is not stopped, or the timing when the second stop operation is performed.

The push order commands set in the push order command setting process of this embodiment are subsequently transmitted to the sub control unit 91 by executing the timer interrupt process (main).

Then, when the sub control unit 91 is specified to perform navigation notification on the main control unit 41 side based on the push order command, the above-mentioned first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command. In addition, a navigation effect is performed. When the sub-control unit 91 performs the navigation effect, the winning of the notification target combination is specified based on the second internal winning command, and the navigation number is other than "0" based on the push order command. That is, when it is specified that the push order advantageous to the player is other than the standard push order, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a stop order image showing the stop order according to the navigation number specified based on the push order command. To display. Further, in the navigation effect, the liquid crystal display 51 displays an image suggesting a combination that may win a prize based on the second internal winning command. At this time, for example, when the push order bell is won as the notification target role, the push order replay is won by displaying the image of the "bell" to suggest the possibility of winning the push order bell. If so, the type of replay GR that may win a prize is specified based on the game state (RT0 to RT3) on the main control unit 41 side specified based on the game state command or the like, and the specified replay is specified. By performing a production according to the role included in the GR (for example, promotion replay in replay GR1-6, special replay in replay GR11-16, red 7 replay or blue 7 replay in replay GR21-26). It is possible to suggest the possibility of winning a role that is advantageous to the person.

Further, as an effect according to the combination included in the replay GR in the navigation effect, for example, even if the replay GR21 to 26 are won in the internal lottery, in the internal winning command transmission process on the main control unit 41 side, the second internal As the winning number for transmitting the winning command, "2" indicating the winning of any of the replay GR1-6, 11-16, 21-26 is uniformly set, but the sub-control unit 91 is the second. Replay GR21-26 has been won by specifying that the transmission winning number is "2" based on the internal winning command and that the game state is RT2 based on the game state command or the like. An image showing the stop order according to the navigation number specified based on the push order command, and an image suggesting that the red 7 replay or the blue 7 replay may win a prize by the operation according to the stop order (this implementation). In the example, by displaying an image that prompts the stop operation at the timing of aiming at the red 7 and the blue 7 on each reel), among the roles included in the replay GR21 to 26, the roles that are advantageous for the player (in this embodiment). , The role with a high average number of games won in the ART game number lottery) can be produced.

Next, the control content of the winning determination command transmission process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19 and 36.

In this embodiment, a winning number (0 to 65) is assigned in advance for each type of winning combination for the special combination and the general combination, and a winning number table in which the winning number is set for each type of winning combination is specified in ROM 41b. It is stored in the area.

As shown in FIG. 18, the winning numbers are assigned for each type of winning combination, that is, for each combination of symbols stopped at the winning line LN, and the "replay a-cherry a-cherry a" of the upper bell 1 is "replay a-cherry a-cherry a". 1 ”is“ 2 ”for“ Replay a-cherry a-white 7 ”,“ 3 ”for“ Replay a-cherry a-BAR ”, and“ Replay a-cherry b-cherry a ”. "4" is assigned "5" to "Replay a-cherry b-white 7", "6" is assigned to "replay a-cherry b-BAR", and "replay a-cherry a-" in the upper bell 2 is assigned. "7" is assigned to "Plum", "8" is assigned to "Replay a-cherry b-Plum", and "9" is assigned to "Replay a-Plum-Cherry a" in the upper bell 3. "10" is assigned to "-Plum-White 7", "11" is assigned to "Replay a-Plum-BAR", and "12" is assigned to "Replay a-Plum-Plum" in the upper bell 4. , "Replay b-cherry a-cherry a" of the upper bell 5 is "13", "replay b-cherry a-white 7" is "14", and "replay b-cherry a-BAR" is "15" is "16" for "Replay b-cherry b-cherry a", "17" for "Replay b-cherry b-white 7", and "Replay b-cherry b-BAR". "18" is assigned, "19" is assigned to "Replay b-cherry a-plum" of the upper bell 6, "20" is assigned to "Replay b-cherry b-plum", and "20" is assigned to the upper bell 7. "21" is assigned to "Replay b-Plum-Cherry a", "22" is assigned to "Replay b-Plum-White 7", and "23" is assigned to "Replay b-Plum-BAR". "24" is assigned to "Replay a-Plum-Plum" of 8.

In addition, "25" is assigned to "Bell-Bell-Bell" in the middle bell, and "26" is assigned to "Replay a-Bell-Red 7" in the downward-sloping bell, but "Replay a-Bell-Replay a". Is assigned "27", "28" is assigned to "Replay b-bell-red 7", and "29" is assigned to "replay b-bell-replay a".

Further, "30" is assigned to the middle watermelon "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon", and "31" is assigned to the right-down watermelon "bell-watermelon-cherry b". In addition, "32" is assigned to "Red 7-Bell-Bell" of Kaku Cherry 1, and "33" is assigned to "BAR-Bell-Bell", and "Red 7-Bell-Replay" of Kaku Cherry 2 is assigned. "34" is assigned to "a", and "35" is assigned to "BAR-bell-replay a".

As shown in FIG. 19, "36" is assigned to "replay a-replay a-replay a" in the middle replay, and "37" is assigned to "replay b-replay a-replay a". "Bell-Replay a-Red 7" is assigned "38", "Bell-Replay a-Bell" is assigned "39", and the promotion replay "Bell-Replay a-Replay a" is "40". Is assigned, and the fall replay "Bell-Red 7-Cherry a" is "41", "Bell-Red 7-Watermelon" is "42", and "Bell-Red 7-Plum" is "43". "Bell-watermelon-cherry a" is "44", "bell-watermelon-watermelon" is "45", "bell-watermelon-plum" is "46", "bell-cherry" "47" is assigned to "a-cherry a", "48" is assigned to "bell-cherry a-watermelon", and "49" is assigned to "bell-cherry a-plum", and the special replay "replay a" is assigned. "Replay a-bell" is assigned "50", and "replay b-replay a-bell" is assigned "51".

In addition, "52" is assigned to "Replay b-Blue 7-Replay a" of the red 7 matching replay, and "53" is assigned to "Replay a-Blue 7-Replay a" of the red 7 missing replay. "54" for "a-watermelon-replay a", "55" for "replay a-cherry a-replay a", "56" for "replay b-watermelon-replay a", "replay b" -Cherry a-Replay a "is assigned" 57 ", and Blue 7-matched replay" Watermelon-Blue 7-Replay a "is assigned" 58 ", and Blue 7 Missed Replay" Watermelon-Watermelon-Replay " "A" is "59", "watermelon-cherry a-replay a" is "60", "bell-blue 7-replay a" is "61", and "bell-watermelon-replay a" is , "62" is assigned to "Bell-cherry a-replay a", and "63" is assigned to it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17, "64" is assigned to "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7" of BB, and "65" is assigned to "Blue 7-Red 7-Red 7" of RB. ing.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 responds to the combination of symbols stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped after the start operation is performed. The winning determination process for determining whether or not a winning has occurred is executed. In the winning determination process, for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R, it is determined whether or not the combination of the symbols constituting the winning combination is stopped on the winning line LN, and the combination of the symbols constituting the winning combination is stopped. When it is determined that, the winning number corresponding to the combination of the symbols constituting the stopped winning combination is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c with reference to the winning number table, while the combination of the symbols constituting the winning combination. If it is determined that is not stopped, "0" indicating a loss is set as a winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the winning determination process is completed.

Then, after executing the winning determination processing, the main control unit 41 executes the winning determination command setting process for setting the winning determination command capable of specifying the winning number in the command queue.

As shown in FIG. 36, in the winning determination command setting process, the winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired based on the winning determination result in the winning determination process (Sh1), and the winning determination command is obtained based on the winning number. Is stored in the command queue (Sh2), and the winning judgment command setting process is completed. When the winning determination command is stored in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores a MODE indicating that the winning determination command is a winning determination command in the first byte, and stores the winning number in the EXT of the second byte.

The winning determination command set in the winning determination command setting process is subsequently transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by executing the timer interrupt processing (main).

In this way, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the winning determination command setting process when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, and sets the winning determination command including the winning number. The winning determination command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

Further, in the winning judgment command setting process of this embodiment, the winning judgment command including the winning number set in the RAM 41c in the winning judgment processing as it is is set in the command queue, so that it can be used as a special command or the like that can specify the winning number. The processing load can be reduced without performing the conversion process.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the winning number is assigned to each type of winning combination and stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 41b, the sub-control unit 91 that has received the winning determination command including the winning number is based on the winning number. It is possible to specify the combination of symbols stopped on each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R and execute the effect.

A conventional slot machine has a configuration including a game control unit that controls a game and an effect control unit that controls an effect, and the game control unit determines an internal lottery result when a predetermined notification target combination is won. In response to this, it is determined whether or not to control the AT that executes the navigation notification that notifies the operation procedure of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player, and when controlling to the AT, the navigation notification is executed and the internal lottery result Is transmitted to the effect control unit regardless of whether or not the AT controls the internal winning command, and the effect control unit identifies the internal lottery result based on the internal winning command and controls the game. When the unit is controlled by the AT, the navigation effect for notifying the operation procedure advantageous to the player is executed based on the specified internal lottery result.

In such a configuration, the effect control unit can specify an operation procedure that is advantageous to the player based on the internal winning command regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT, so that the effect control unit is illegal. By doing so, although the game control unit has not decided to control the AT, the internal winning command identifies an operation procedure that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result, and the operation procedure is There is a possibility that it will be notified by the production control unit.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment uses the internal lottery result as an internal winning command, and the first internal winning command and the general winning command that can specify the winning status of the special combination as the internal lottery result. A second internal winning command that can specify the winning status is set in the internal winning command setting process, and the set command can be transmitted to the sub control unit 91. In the internal winning command setting process, the AT is controlled. Regardless of whether or not it has been done, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, it can be specified that the notification target combination has been won, but it is general so that the stop order that is advantageous for the player cannot be specified. Since the second internal winning command related to the combination is set, it is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result from the second internal winning command regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. Since the common second internal winning command is transmitted regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT without specifying the stop order, the process related to the transmission of the second internal winning command can be simplified. Even if the sub-control unit 91 side is cheated, it is possible to prevent the stop order that is advantageous for the player from being notified by the navigation effect without being controlled by the AT.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 has a configuration in which the stop order of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, which is advantageous for the player, is notified by the navigation notification according to the notification target combination won by the internal winning. The control unit 41 operates by navigation notification at one of a plurality of different operation timings, an operation mode of operating in any one of a plurality of operation orders, and an operation mode based on a combination thereof. Even in such a configuration, it is specified that the main control unit 41 has won the notification target combination regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. However, by setting the second internal winning command so that the operation mode advantageous to the player cannot be specified, the sub-control unit 91 side responds to the internal lottery result from the second internal winning command. An operation mode that is advantageous to the player is not specified.

Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a push order replay and a push order bell as notification target roles for executing the navigation notification, and the main control unit 41 has an internal lottery in the internal winning command setting process. When the result becomes the notification target combination, a second internal winning command is set so that it can be specified whether the notification target combination is a push order replay or a push order bell, and the sub control unit 91 is set. When the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, the sub control unit 91 can specify whether the notification target combination is a push order replay or a push order bell, and the sub control unit 91 can specify. It is also possible to perform different effects depending on the type of the notification target role.

Further, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment is controlled by the AT, and when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination in the state where the navigation notification is executed, the stop order advantageous to the player is specified. Since the push order command setting process for setting the push order command that can be performed is executed and the set push order command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, the player can use the sub control unit 91 side in the state where the navigation notification is executed. It is possible to perform a navigation effect that notifies an advantageous stop order.

Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a push order replay and a push order bell as notification target roles for executing the navigation notification, and the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification in the push order command setting process. The notification target combination won in the internal lottery is different when the internal lottery result is a push order replay and when the push order bell is executed, that is, when the navigation notification is executed. However, when the stop order that is advantageous to the player is common, the push order command including the common navigation number that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player is set, so that the types of push order commands can be reduced. it can.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment specifies a stop order that is advantageous for the player when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination in the state where the navigation notification is executed in the push order command setting process. While setting a push order command including a possible navigation number, in a state other than the state in which navigation notification is executed, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target role, it is not possible to specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player. Since the push order command including the navigation number that can specify the standard push order (first stop on the left) is set, the internal lottery result becomes the notification target regardless of whether or not the navigation notification is executed. Sometimes, the process of setting the push order command including the navigation number can be shared.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped stepwise each time the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, which is advantageous for the player. The order is determined before the operation of all the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, that is, the operation of the third stop is completed. For example, when the push order bell is won, the first stop operation is performed. By doing so, it is decided whether or not the middle bell will be won, and when the replays GR11 to 16 are won, the first stop operation is performed to determine whether or not the special replay is won, and the replay is performed. When GR21-26 is won, the first stop operation is performed to determine whether or not Red 7-matched replay, Red 7 missed replay or Blue 7-matched replay, and Blue 7 missed replay can be won, and Replay GR1- At the time of winning 6, the second stop operation is performed to determine whether or not the promotion replay will be won, and the main control unit 41 executes navigation notification in the push order command setting process. When the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination in a state other than the state in which the game is played, the stop order advantageous to the player is determined, that is, after the first stop and the second stop operations are performed. Since the push order command including the navigation number that can specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player according to the internal winning result is set and transmitted, even if the sub-control unit 91 is fraudulent, the stop order that is advantageous for the player is set. While preventing the identification, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, the sub-control unit 91 side can perform an effect according to whether or not the operation is performed in a stop order advantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 stops the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R when the notification target combination is won in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed in the push order command setting process. When it is determined that the winning combination to be stopped is determined, a push order command including a navigation number capable of specifying a stop order advantageous to the player is set, and the push order command is sent to the sub-control unit 91. However, the command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player after the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is performed and the winning combination to be stopped is determined is different from the push order command. It may also be a command. For example, by transmitting another command including the winning number of the notification target combination won in the internal lottery, the stop order advantageous to the player is determined based on the type of the notification target combination won. The configuration may be such that it can be specified, or it may be configured to provide a separate command including a navigation number that can specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 executes the push order command setting process only when the internal lottery is performed, and then when the winning combination to be stopped is determined, the stop order is advantageous to the player. It is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41 by configuring the process to set the command that can specify.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to execute the push order command setting process when the internal lottery is performed and when the stop operations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are performed. After the combination to be stopped is determined, each time the push order command setting process is performed, a push order command capable of specifying a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player after the winning combination is determined may be a configuration that is transmitted at least once when the stopping combination is determined, and the stopping combination is determined and the game is played. After the push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the person is transmitted, the push order command setting process may not be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs push order command setting processing when the internal lottery is performed and when the stop operations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are performed in the state of performing the navigation notification. However, in the case where the navigation notification is performed, the push order command setting process may be executed only when the internal lottery is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41 when the navigation notification is performed.

When the start operation is performed, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment performs an internal lottery, sets a different winning number for each internal lottery result in the RAM 41c according to the internal lottery result, and sets the winning number. The internal winning flag is set, navigation notification, command creation, stop control of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are performed according to the above, and the winning status of the special role is displayed as an internal winning command that can specify the internal lottery result. A first internal winning command that can be specified and a second internal winning command that can specify the winning status of a general combination are set in the internal winning command setting process, and the set command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. It is a configuration, and the winning number when the notification target combination is won as the internal winning result is a predetermined numerical range (the winning number of the push order replay as the notification target combination is 2 to 19, and the winning number of the push order bell is , 23 to 34) are assigned, and in the internal winning command setting process, the winning set in the RAM 41c is set in a state other than the state controlled by the AT and the navigation notification is executed. When the number is in the predetermined numerical range (2 to 19, 23 to 34), a second internal winning command that can specify that the winning combination has been notified but cannot specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player is issued. Since the set and set second internal winning command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, it is internal from the second internal winning command regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. Since the stop order that is advantageous for the player is not specified according to the lottery result, even if the sub-control unit 91 side is cheated, the stop order that is advantageous for the player is a navigation effect without being controlled by the AT. It is possible to prevent the command from being notified.

Further, as the winning number set when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, a continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range is assigned, and the main control unit 41 uses the internal lottery result as the notification target combination. Since it can be determined whether or not the winning number used when performing the predetermined control is within the predetermined numerical range assigned to the notification target combination, the second internal winning command is transmitted. The processing when doing so can be simplified.

Further, in the present embodiment, the push order replay and the push order bell are included as the notification target roles for which the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification, and the winning number when the internal lottery result is the push order replay, That is, the internal lottery result is assigned a continuous numerical value in the first numerical range (2 to 19) as the winning number of each lottery target combination of replay GR1-6, replay GR11-16, and replay GR21-26, and the internal lottery result. The winning number when is the push order bell, that is, the winning number of each lottery target combination of the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4, is the second numerical range ( Since the consecutive numerical values of 23 to 34) are assigned, the main control unit 41 determines whether the winning number is in the first numerical range or the second numerical value when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination. Since it can be determined whether the internal lottery result is a push order replay or a push order bell according to the range, the process of setting the second internal winning command in the internal winning command setting process can be simplified. ..

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has RT1 or RT2 as the first state with respect to the first state (RT0, RT1, RT2) and the second state (for example, RT0 as the first state). It is possible to control a plurality of gaming states (RT0 to 4, RB) including RT0 or RT2 for RT1 and RT0 or RT1 for RT2 as the first state, and in each gaming state, The types of push order replays as notification target roles determined in the internal lottery are different (in this embodiment, for example, in RT0, while replays GR11 to 16 are lottery target roles, replays GR1 to 6 and replays GR21 to 21 26 is not a lottery target role, and in RT1, replay GR1 to 6 are lottery target roles, while replay GR11 to 16 and replay GR21 to 26 are not lottery target roles, and in RT2, replay GR21 to 26 are lottery target roles. On the other hand, the replay GR1 to 6 and the replay GR11 to 16 are not the lottery target roles, and the types of the notification target roles to be internally elected are different in the game states RT0 to 2), and the game state is The winning number when the internal lottery result is the push order replay in the first state and the winning number when the internal lottery result is the push order replay in the second state of the game state are both the first. Since it is assigned to the numerical range (2 to 19), in the internal winning command setting process, it is for determining whether or not the internal lottery result is a push order replay in both the first state and the second state. Processing can be standardized.

Further, in the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment responds to the internal lottery result when the internal lottery result is a combination other than the notification target combination or a loss in the state of not being controlled by the AT. When the second internal winning command including the winning number (0 to 1, 20 to 22, 35 in this embodiment) is set and the internal lottery result is the push order replay which is the notification target combination, the first When one winning number (2 in this embodiment) included in the numerical range (2 to 19) is included and the internal lottery result is the push order bell which is the notification target combination, the second numerical range (23 to 34) is included. By setting a second internal winning command including one winning number (23 in this embodiment) included in), the internal lottery result is the notification target combination in a state where the AT is not controlled. Even if the winning combination is other than the notification target combination, the second internal winning command including the winning number corresponding to the internal lottery result is transmitted. Therefore, regardless of whether the internal lottery result is the notification target combination or not. The process of creating and transmitting the second internal winning command can be standardized.

In the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the notification target combination when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. Although it is possible to specify that the player has won, a second internal winning command related to the general role is set so that the stop order that is advantageous to the player cannot be specified, but when the state is not controlled by the AT. , When the result of the internal lottery becomes the notification target combination, it can be specified that the notification target combination has been won, but the second internal winning related to the general role can be specified so that the stop order advantageous to the player cannot be specified. While setting the command, when the AT is in control, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, the winning number according to the type of the notification target combination won, for example, as a push order replay When the replay GR11 is won, the winning number is "8", and when the middle bell 1 is won as the push order bell, the AT is controlled by setting a second internal winning command including the winning number "27". When it is in the state, a second internal winning command capable of specifying the type of the winning notification target combination may be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, the stop order advantageous to the player can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command according to the type of the notification target combination, so that the sub On the control unit 91 side, the stop order advantageous to the player can be notified by the navigation effect. Further, in such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, the winning number of the lottery target winning combination in the internal lottery can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command, so that the lottery target winning combination internally won. It is possible to perform an effect according to the type of winning combination included in, for example, an effect suggesting the possibility that the red 7 replay included in the replay GR21 will be won when the replay GR21 is won.

Further, in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may be configured not to execute the push order command setting process and not to transmit the push order command, and is controlled by the AT by such a configuration. In the state, the stop order advantageous to the player can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command according to the type of the notification target combination, and the stop order advantageous to the player can be specified on the sub-control unit 91 side. It can be notified by the navigation effect, and the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41 can be reduced.

The winning number of the push order replay and the winning number of the push order bell need only be set in a continuous numerical range, and the first numerical range and the push order in which the winning number of the push order replay is set are set. The configuration may be continuous with the second numerical range in which the winning number of the bell is set. Even with such a configuration, as in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the internal lottery result is the notification target combination, and the winning number used when performing predetermined control is the notification target combination. Since it can be determined whether or not it is within the predetermined numerical range assigned to the user, the process of transmitting the second internal winning command can be simplified.

Further, in this embodiment, 1 to 35 are assigned as the winning numbers of the general winning combination, and the winning numbers of the push order replay which is the notification target combination are continuously set in the first numerical range (2 to 19). , The winning number of the push order bell which is the notification target combination is continuously set in the second numerical range (23 to 34), and the winning number of the non-notifying target combination is the first numerical range and the second numerical range. Although the configuration is distributed and set in the numerical range before and after the above, the winning numbers of all the non-notifying target combinations may be continuously set in the third numerical range. With such a configuration, whether or not the internal lottery result is the notification target combination is within the predetermined numerical range assigned to the notification target combination by the winning number used when performing the predetermined control. Since it can be determined by whether or not, it is possible to simplify the process when transmitting the second internal winning command, and it is determined whether or not the winning number assigned to the non-notifying target combination is within a predetermined numerical range. The process to be performed can be simplified.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the internal winning command transmission process, the main control unit 41 has the same type of notification target combination group (in this embodiment, the push order replay group and the push order bell) regardless of the game state. The same transmission winning number (in this embodiment, "2" for the push order replay group and "23" for the push order bell group) is uniformly set for each group), and the transmission is performed. The configuration is such that a second internal winning command including the credit winning number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, but in the internal winning command transmission process, at least the group of the notification target role for which the same transmission winning number is set is set. , Regardless of whether or not it is controlled by AT, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, it can be specified that the notification target combination has been won, but it is possible to specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player. It is only necessary to prevent this, and the groups of the same type of notification target roles that are the targets of the lottery in one game state are divided into a plurality of groups so that each group includes one role that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, a different transmission winning number may be set for each divided group. As a result, it is possible for the sub-control unit 91 side to specify whether the notification target combination belonging to any of the plurality of groups has been elected, and to execute the effect according to the specified group. With such a configuration, for example, in the push order replay of the present embodiment, the replays GR21 to 26 whose game state is the target of the lottery in RT2 are advantageous roles for the player (in this embodiment, the red 7 replay and the blue 7). The first group (replay GR21-23) and the second group (replay GR24-26) are divided so that the replays) are included one by one, and different transmissions are made to the first group and the second group. By setting the credit winning numbers (for example, 2A and 2B), the sub-control unit 91 issues a second internal winning command including a transmitting winning number indicating the first group when the game state is RT2. By receiving, it is possible to identify that the first group has won and perform an effect that suggests the possibility that the Red 7 replay will win, while for transmission indicating the second group. By receiving the second internal winning command including the winning number, it is possible to identify that the second group has won and perform an effect suggesting that the Blue 7 replay may win, that is, the player. It is possible to perform an effect that identifies a more advantageous role for the player.

Next, an effect executed by the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment using the display area 51a and the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 42.

The sub control unit 91 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53, 54, and the reel LED 55 based on various commands received from the main control unit 41 described above. It is possible to execute an effect according to the progress status of the main control unit 41 and the control status of the main control unit 41. In particular, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment displays an image or the like in the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 according to the progress of the game, so that the image or the like is superimposed on the front surfaces of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It is possible to execute the reel front effect to be displayed. Further, when the control state of the main control unit 41 is an error state, an error notification effect for notifying the type of error can be executed, and when the front door 1b is in the open state, a door opening notification effect can be executed. When the main control unit 41 is in the setting change state, it is possible to execute the setting change notification effect for notifying that the setting is being changed, and when the main control unit 41 is in the standby state, it is in the standby state. It is possible to execute a standby effect indicating.

The reel front effect includes a during-game front effect (see FIG. 37 (a)) that is executed according to the progress of the game specified based on various received commands during the game, and a non-game. It includes a non-game front surface effect (FIGS. 37 (b) and (c)) that is executed according to the result of the game in a certain period.

In this embodiment, the term “during the game” means that the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the number of bets is set to a predetermined number in order to start the game for a game in which a winning combination, that is, a small winning combination is won. From the start of the game to the completion of the payout of the medals associated with the winning of the winning combination, the role without paying out, that is, the replaying role, the game in which the special role is won, and any of the above. For games in which the winning combination was not won, that is, the internal lottery result was lost or the winning combination could not be won and the so-called missed game, the number of bets was set to the specified number in order to start the game. From the time when the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started to the time when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as the game progresses. The sub-control unit 91 identifies that the game has started by receiving the internal winning command, and when it is specified that the winning combination with payout has won by receiving the winning determination command, After that, by receiving the payout end command, it is specified that the game has ended, while by receiving the winning judgment command, if the winning combination without paying is specified or the loss is specified. , Identifies that the game has ended based on the receipt of the winning determination command. Further, in the present embodiment, "during the game" is a period in which the rotation of at least one reel is controlled in the reel rotation process, and the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is delayed after the start switch 7 is operated. It also includes a period of time during which the reels are delayed and a period of time during which the stop operation for stopping the reels is invalidated after the reels have started rotating.

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), in the front effect during the game, the area corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through which the winning line LN passes out of the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 displays an image or the like. It is set as an effect prohibition area to be prohibited, and an effect of displaying an image or the like in an area other than the effect prohibition area among the display area 51a and the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is performed during the game. For example, by displaying an image of a predetermined character in an area other than the production prohibited area, it is suggested that a predetermined combination may have been won.

As a result, during the period of the game, the image or the like is not displayed on the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 so as to overlap with the area corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through which the winning line LN passes. The visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the winning line LN is not deteriorated.

Further, in the front effect during the game, the transmittance of the image or the like displayed in the area other than the effect prohibited area in the transmission area 51b is set in the range of 0% to 100%, and the reel on the back of the image or the like is set. While the visibility of the 2L, 2C, and 2R is lower than the normal visibility in which the image or the like is not displayed, the visibility of the image or the like is enhanced to produce the effect.

In addition, in the front effect during the game, the number of credits displayed from the time when the normal effect before executing the front effect during rotation, the number of games after the end of ART or RB, the number of medals to be paid out, etc. The game history information regarding the game history is displayed in the display area 51a.

As shown in FIGS. 37 (b) and 37 (c), in the non-game front effect, the effect prohibition area like the game front effect is not set in the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, and the winning line LN is Images and the like are superimposed and displayed over all the transparent areas 51b and the display area 51a including the areas corresponding to the symbols of the passing reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For example, the symbols corresponding to the winning combination are displayed. Is displayed to notify that the winning combination has won (FIG. 37 (b)), or an image indicating that the ART lottery has been won is displayed to notify that the AT is controlled (FIG. 37 (Fig. 37)). c)).

Further, in the non-game front effect, game history information related to the game history such as the number of credits is displayed in the display area 51a, and if there is a payout, the number of medals and the number of credits paid out according to the payout are displayed. Is to be updated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38A, the transmittance range of the image or the like to be displayed for each portion is set in the transmittance region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, and the winning line LN in the transmission region 51b. The range of transmittance of the region corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (region D in FIG. 38A) is 20% to 100%, and the reels 2L, 2C, through which the winning line LN passes. The range of transmittance of the region other than the region corresponding to the 2R symbol (region E in FIG. 38 (a)) is 0% to 100%. As a result, in the area E of the transmission area 51b other than the area corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R through which the winning line LN passes, the transmittance is 0%, that is, the reels 2L, 2C and 2R on the back surface cannot be visually recognized. On the other hand, in the area D corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through which the winning line LN passes, the transmittance is at least 20% and the reel on the back surface of the area D is set. It is possible to display an image or the like in a manner in which 2L, 2C, and 2R are not invisible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), in the reel front effect, an image or the like (for example, an image or the like) that is integrally displayed over the display area 51a other than the transmission area 51b and the above-mentioned area E having a transmittance of 0% to 100% (for example). In the image A) in FIG. 38B, the transmittance of 0%, that is, the rear reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in an invisible manner, while the transmittance region D including the region D having a transmittance of 20% to 100% The image or the like (for example, the image B in FIG. 38B) to be integrally displayed over 51b has a transmittance of 20%, that is, a transmittance equal to or higher than the minimum transmittance of the region D, and the rear reels 2L, 2C, The 2R is displayed in such a manner that it is not invisible.

As a result, when one image or the like to be integrally displayed in the transmittance region 51b is displayed over the region D having a transmittance of 20% to 100% and the region E having a transmittance of 0% to 100%, the image or the like is displayed. Since the transmittance of the entire image is displayed in the transmittance region 51b according to the transmittance of the region where the minimum value of the transmittance is high, the visual mode of the image or the like does not change at the boundary between the regions having different transmittances. The visibility of the entire image can be integrated.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment has various abnormalities (medal insertion abnormality, medal selector 29) such as when any one of a rotation error, a medal insertion error, and a medal payout error is detected in the reel control process as described above. When foreign matter detection, reel rotation abnormality, medal payout abnormality, foreign matter detection near the payout exit, RAM abnormality, set value abnormality, empty hopper tank 34a, full tank detection of overflow tank 35, abnormal winning, etc.) are detected. An error command capable of identifying the type of abnormality detected by executing error processing is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. As shown in FIG. 39, the error command includes error codes E1 to E8 that can identify the type of abnormality occurring. E1 is an overflow error and indicates that the overflow tank 35 is full, E2 is a medal supply error and an empty state of the hopper tank 34a is detected, and E3 is a medal. It is a clogging error and indicates that a foreign substance near the medal payout outlet 9 has been detected. E4 is a medal payout error, and when the reel rotation process or the like is performed and the payout is not originally performed, the payout is performed. Indicates that the above has been detected, E5 indicates a medal insertion error, and the insertion medal sensor 31 has detected an abnormal passage of a medal, and E6 indicates a rotation error and reel rotation. Indicates that an abnormality has been detected, E7 is an abnormal winning error, and an internal lottery has detected a winning combination for which winning is not allowed. E8 is a RAM error, and RAM 41c at startup. Indicates that the data in is detected to be abnormal.

Further, when the output state of the door open detection switch 25 changes, the door command is executed, and when the setting is changed at the time of activation, the setting command is executed, and the bet number is not set after one game is completed. When the estimated end time (60 seconds in this embodiment) elapses and the state shifts to the standby state, a standby command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 executes an error notification effect for notifying the error code specified based on the error command by receiving the error command, and receives the door command to notify the front door 1b. When it is specified that is in the open state, the door open notification effect for notifying that the front door 1b is open is executed, and the setting command is received to indicate that the setting is in the open state. The notification effect during setting change is executed, and by receiving the standby command, the standby effect indicating that the user is in the standby state is executed.

As shown in FIG. 40, in the error notification effect, the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is set as an effect prohibition area for prohibiting the display of images and the like, and the display area excluding the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51. In the predetermined area of 51a (in the predetermined frame A in this embodiment), an error code specified based on the error command and characters, images, etc. indicating the content of the error are placed in a common area regardless of the type of error. To display. That is, during the period when the main control unit 41 controls the error state and the error notification effect is being executed, the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, that is, the reels 2L and 2C through which the winning lines LN and the invalid lines LM1 to 4 pass. By keeping the transmittance at 100% without displaying an image or the like in the display area 51a that overlaps with the area corresponding to the 2R symbol, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized through the transmission area 51b. It is designed so that the sex does not deteriorate.

Further, in the error notification effect, the game history information related to the game history such as the number of credits displayed in the front effect during the game is made invisible to the player, and as shown in FIG. 39, the effect LED 52 Is lit in a predetermined lighting mode indicating that an error has occurred, and a predetermined sound indicating that an error has occurred is output from the speakers 53 and 54, whereby the liquid crystal display 51 and the effect LED 52 are displayed. , Speakers 53 and 54 are used to notify the type of error occurring.

As a result, the sub control unit 91 is controlled to an error state in the main control unit 41, and during the period when the error notification effect is being executed, the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, that is, the winning line LN and the invalid lines LM1 to 4 Since no image or the like is displayed in the display area 51a that overlaps with the area corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through which the reels pass, the liquid crystal display is performed when an error occurs during the execution of the above-mentioned reel front effect. By switching the effect mode of the device 51 from the front effect to the error notification effect, all the areas of the transmission area 51b including the areas corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through which the invalid lines LM1 to LM pass are transparent. The visibility at the normal time is set to 100%, and the occurrence of the abnormality specified by the error command is notified.

Further, regardless of the type of error, a common control, that is, a common effect prohibition area is set, and an error code or the like is displayed in a common predetermined area to notify the error.

As shown in FIG. 39, in the door opening notification effect, the effect LED 52 is turned on in a predetermined lighting mode indicating that the front door 1b is in the open state, and the front door 1b is in the open state from the speakers 53 and 54. By outputting a predetermined sound indicating that effect, the effect LED 52 and the speakers 53, 54 are used to notify the type of error occurring. In the door opening notification effect, the display mode of the liquid crystal display 51 is not changed based on the reception of the door command, and the display mode performed before receiving the door command is continued. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 41, in the setting changing notification effect, the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is set as an effect prohibition area for prohibiting the display of an image or the like, as in the error notification effect. A message indicating that the setting has been changed is displayed in a predetermined area of the display area 51a (in the predetermined frame B in this embodiment) excluding the transparent area 51b of the display 51, and the setting is controlled to the changed state. Notify that. Further, in the setting change notification, the game history information related to the game history such as the number of credits is made invisible to the player as in the error notification effect.

As a result, the main control unit 41 is controlled to the setting change state, and the reel through which the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, that is, the winning line LN and the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 pass during the period during which the setting changing effect is being executed. Images and the like are not displayed over the area corresponding to the 2L, 2C, and 2R symbols, and the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through the transmission area 51b is not reduced. There is.

The standby effect executed by the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment includes a normal demonstration effect (hereinafter referred to as a demo effect) indicating that the device is in a standby state, and power consumption in the slot machine 1 as compared with the demo effect. The sub-control unit 91 shifts to the standby state when the power-saving mode is selected in advance by the standby effect switch 57 as the effect mode of the standby effect. When this is done, the power saving mode is executed as a standby effect, and if the power saving mode is not selected, a normal demo effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 42 (a), in the demonstration effect, the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is set as an effect prohibition area for prohibiting the display of an image or the like, as in the error notification effect. A message indicating that the demo is being produced is displayed in a predetermined area of the display area 51a (in the predetermined frame B in this embodiment) excluding the transparent area 51b of the 51, and the setting change state is controlled. Notify. Also, in the demo production, the number of games since the end of ART or RB among the game history information related to the game history such as the number of credits can be made visible to the player, while other history information cannot be seen. To do. It should be noted that the history information other than the number of games since the end of ART or RB may also be visible to the player or the like, and even if the configuration is such that all the history information that can be displayed can be visually recognized by the player or the like. Good, a predetermined priority, for example, information that is advantageous to a player who has played a game until then, information that is advantageous to a new player who plays a game after that, a slot machine 1 is installed. A predetermined part of the history information may be visible to the player or the like depending on the information that is useful for the management or operation of the store clerk or the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39, in the demonstration effect, the effect using the liquid crystal display 51 and the effect LED 52 is executed by lighting the effect LED 52 in a predetermined lighting mode indicating that the demonstration effect is in progress. It has become like.

As shown in FIG. 42B, in the power saving mode, the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is set as an effect prohibition region for prohibiting the display of an image or the like, as in the error notification effect, and the liquid crystal display. A message indicating that the power saving mode is set is displayed in a predetermined area (in the predetermined frame B in this embodiment) of the display area 51a excluding the transparent area 51b of the device 51 to indicate that the setting is changed. Is notified. Further, in the setting change notification, the information related to the game history such as the number of credits is made invisible to the player as in the error notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39, in the power saving mode, the effect LED 52 is not turned on as in the demonstration effect, and the effect using the minimum effect device of only the liquid crystal display 51 is executed. ing.

In this way, the main control unit 41 is controlled to the standby state, and during the period when the demo effect or the power saving mode is executed as the standby effect, the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, that is, the winning line LN and the invalid line LM1 to The image or the like is not displayed on top of the area corresponding to the pattern of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R through which the LM4 passes, and the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R through the transmission area 51b is not deteriorated. It has become.

Next, the effect executed by the sub-control unit 91 using the reel LED 55 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45.

The reel LED 55 is provided inside each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, and for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, each symbol on the winning line LN and the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 is independently irradiated from behind. It is possible.

As shown in FIG. 43, for example, reel LEDs 55L11, 55L12, 55L13 capable of irradiating the symbol from the back side are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction inside the position corresponding to the upper symbol of the left reel 2L. Similarly for the left reel 2L, the other middle and lower stages are provided with three reel LEDs 55L21 to 23 and 55L31 to 33 for each symbol, and the other middle reels 2C and the right reel 2R are similarly provided with reel LEDs 55C11 to 1. 13, 55C21-23, 55C31-3, 55R11-13, 55R21-23, 55R31-3 (reference numerals omitted in FIG. 43) are provided, and the reel LED 55 is composed of a total of 36 LEDs.

The sub-control unit 91 can independently control each of the LEDs constituting the reel LED 55 to turn off, turn on at low brightness, and turn on at high brightness. When controlling the lighting mode of the reel LED 55, the sub control unit 91 is in an OFF state in which the applied voltage to the corresponding LED is 0V when controlling the lighting mode of each LED of the reel LED 55 to be turned off. When a control signal is output from the LED drive circuit 93 to control high-brightness lighting, high-brightness ON state control in which a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V) is applied to the corresponding LED at a predetermined duty ratio. When a signal is output from the LED drive circuit 93 to control low-brightness lighting, a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V) is applied to the corresponding LED at a predetermined duty ratio lower than that in the case of high-brightness. A low-brightness ON state control signal is output from the LED drive circuit 93.

In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 has a configuration in which the reel LED 55 emits light with low brightness and high brightness by changing the duty ratio of the control signal output from the LED drive circuit 93. For example, the reel. By turning on only a predetermined part of the LEDs of the plurality of LEDs constituting the LED 55 and turning off the LEDs of the other parts, that is, by controlling the number of LEDs to be turned on or off, the brightness of the entire or part of the reel LED 55 can be increased. The configuration may be changed, or the brightness of the entire or part of the reel LED 55 may be changed by changing the current value of energizing each LED constituting the reel LED 55 to change the brightness of each LED. You may.

As shown in FIGS. 44 (b) and 44 (d), the sub-control unit 91 stops when a predetermined combination of symbols (combination of symbols constituting the winning combination, combination of reach or chance) stops at the winning line LN. , It is possible to execute a backlight effect that changes the lighting mode of the reel LED 55.

As shown in FIG. 44 (b), when the sub control unit 91 receives the game end command from the main control unit 41, the combination of predetermined symbols on the winning line LN is stopped at the winning line LN, and When the above-mentioned reel front effect is not being executed, that is, when the image or the like is not displayed in the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, all the transparent windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are supported. By changing the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 in the area to turn off and turn on (high brightness) a predetermined number of times (see FIG. 44 (a)) and execute a backlight effect of blinking, the reels 2L, 2C, The visibility of the 2R symbols is changed to notify that the combination of predetermined symbols has stopped.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (d), when the sub control unit 91 receives the game end command from the main control unit 41, the combination of predetermined symbols on the winning line LN is stopped at the winning line LN. In addition, when the above-mentioned reel front effect is executed, that is, when an image or the like is displayed in the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, it corresponds to the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. By changing the lighting mode of the reel LEDs 55 in all areas to lighting (low brightness) and lighting (high brightness) a predetermined number of times (see FIG. 44 (c)), and performing a backlight effect of blinking, the lighting mode is executed. The visibility of the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is changed to notify that the combination of predetermined symbols has stopped.

As described above, when the sub-control unit 91 executes the backlight effect, the reel front effect is executed, and when the image or the like is displayed in the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, the reel LED55 By changing the lighting mode between high-brightness lighting and low-brightness lighting without turning off the lighting mode, the transmission region 51b is irradiated with a brightness higher than that of the low-brightness lighting, so that it is displayed in the transmission region 51b. It is possible to perform the backlight effect while ensuring the visibility of the images and the like and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back surface of the transmission region 51b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45A, the sub-control unit 91 switches the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 between turning off or lighting (low brightness) and lighting (high brightness) when executing the backlight effect. At the same time, the transmissive region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is kept constant at a high transmittance (for example, 100%) to change the visibility of the transmissive region 51b and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back surface, while FIG. 45 As shown in (b), when the dark display mode is set to reduce the visibility of the transmittance region 51b when the backlight effect is not executed, the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 is maintained at lighting (high brightness). By lowering the transmittance of the transmission region 51b, the visibility of the transmission region 51b and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back surface are changed.

As shown in FIG. 47, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment moves the projecting body 301 of the accessory 300 from the storage position to the projecting position to turn on the rotating light 302 in a predetermined lighting mode. It is feasible, and when a special role is won in the internal lottery or when it is won in the ART lottery, the character production lottery that determines the time to execute the character production is executed and determined by the character production lottery. At the end of the played game, perform a character effect.

The sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the effect is set to be restricted by the effect limit switch 58 when the game end command is received when the game determined by the character effect effect lottery ends. If the determination is made and the effect is not set to be restricted, a caution message indicating that the projecting body 301 of the accessory 300 operates and moves to the projecting position is displayed in the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51. .. After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the effect motor 305 is driven so as to move the projecting body 301 from the storage position to the projecting position, and the rotating light 302 is rotated while being turned on. Further, the effect sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54 in accordance with the lighting and rotation of the rotating light 302. After that, the production sound is switched to the production mode of the next game by performing the operation of setting the number of bets for starting the next game, and the rotating light 302 is moved to the storage position after a predetermined time elapses. While stopping lighting and rotation, the character production is completed.

On the other hand, at the end of the game in which the character effect is executed, it is determined whether or not the effect is set to be restricted by the effect limit switch 58, and if it is set to limit the effect, a caution message is given. Is not displayed and the projecting body 301 of the accessory 300 is rotated while being turned on without moving the projecting body 301 to the projecting position, and the effect sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54 in accordance with the lighting and rotation of the rotating light 302. .. After that, the operation of setting the number of bets for starting the next game is performed to switch the effect sound to the effect mode of the next game, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rotation of the rotating light 302 is stopped. Let's finish the character production.

As described above, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment includes the accessory 300, and can execute the effect of projecting the projecting body 301 of the accessory 300 above the slot machine 1, and the effect limiting switch 58. Since it is possible to set in advance to limit the execution of the effect of projecting the projecting body 301, an island facility or the like is provided above the installation location of the slot machine 1 in a game store or the like. However, by limiting in advance that the effect of projecting the projecting body 301 is executed, the projecting body 301 is projected above the slot machine 1 and interferes with the island equipment and the like above the slot machine 1. Can be prevented.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment includes the accessory 300, and can execute an effect of projecting the projecting body 301 of the accessory 300 above the slot machine 1, and also projects by the effect limiting switch 58. It is possible to set in advance to limit the execution of the effect of projecting the body 301, and when the effect of projecting the projecting body 301 of the accessory 300 is executed, the projecting of the accessory 300 is performed. Since a caution message indicating that the body 301 operates and moves to the protruding position is displayed, it is possible to call attention to the player or the like before projecting the protruding body 301.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment includes the accessory 300, and can execute an effect of projecting the projecting body 301 of the accessory 300 above the slot machine 1, and also projects by the effect limiting switch 58. When it is possible to set in advance to limit the execution of the effect of projecting the body 301, and to limit the execution of the effect of projecting the body 301 in advance. Since the caution message is not displayed and the protrusion 301 is not projected in the effect, it is possible to prevent the caution message from being displayed even though the protrusion does not protrude.

In this embodiment, the accessory 300 is provided with a projecting body 301 that can project upward from the slot machine 1, but the accessory 300 is provided with a projecting body that can project in the left-right direction or forward of the slot machine 1. You may. In such a configuration, by making it possible to restrict the execution of the effect of projecting the projecting body by operating the effect limiting switch or the like, the projecting body may be projected and collide with an object or the like around the slot machine 1. Can be prevented. Further, in such a configuration, when the execution of the effect of projecting the projecting body is restricted by the operation of the effect limiting switch or the like, a caution message indicating that the projecting body operates and moves to the projecting position is displayed on the liquid crystal display. By adopting a configuration that does not display on a display or the like, it is possible to prevent a caution message from being displayed even though the projecting body does not project.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment has a liquid crystal display having a transmission region 51b at a position on the front side (player side) of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R so that each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side. The device 51 is provided, and by displaying an image or the like in the transparent area 51b in response to receiving a command from the main control unit 41 or the like, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are visible to the player. In the front region of the overlapping reels 2L, 2C and 2R, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R from the player side to a different visibility from the usual one.

In such a configuration, it is permitted to perform an effect of changing the visibility of the reels in the specific area corresponding to the symbol of each reel through which the winning line LN for which the winning is determined does not pass in the transmission area 51b. By prohibiting the execution of the effect in the predetermined area corresponding to the symbol of each reel through which the winning line LN passes, the reel 2L is secured while ensuring the visibility of the area on the winning line LN of each reel. It is possible to execute the effect on the front of the 2C, 2R, but even if the visibility is secured only in the predetermined area on the winning line LN, the visibility of the predetermined area other than the winning line LN remains changed. Then, when an event such as an abnormality related to the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R occurs, it becomes difficult to grasp the situation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can detect that the specific event has occurred when a specific event that may have caused an abnormality such as a reel rotation error occurs. The sub-control unit 91 can execute an effect of changing the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the player side in the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, and is in the game. During the period during which at least one reel 2L, 2C, and 2R is rotated, the player in the specific area corresponding to the symbol of each reel through which the winning line LN for which the winning is determined in the transmission area 51b does not pass passes. When a specific event occurs while performing an effect of changing the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the side so as to lower the visibility than usual, all including the specific area of the transmission area 51b. Since the occurrence of a specific event is notified by normal visibility with the transmittance of the region of 100%, the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be improved during the period during which the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating as the game progresses. When performing the effect of changing, by changing the visibility of a specific area of the transmission area 51b, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the predetermined area can be visually recognized in the widest possible transmission area 51b without deteriorating the visibility. While it is possible to produce an effect that changes the sex, the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is changed in the region including the specific region of the transmission region 51b during the period during the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as the game progresses. When a specific event occurs in the situation where the effect is being executed, the visibility of the entire area including the specific area of the transmission area 51b is ensured so that the situation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be easily grasped. Can be done.

In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 has a transmittance of 100 in the transmission region 51b as an effect of changing the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the player side in the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51. By displaying an image or the like of less than% and displaying the image or the like on the front surface of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R on the back surface is changed. In the effect of changing the visibility of 2C and 2R, the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R corresponding to the see-through window 3 may be changed from the normal visibility to a special visibility, and the see-through window 3 may be used. A transmissive display device other than the liquid crystal display, for example, an EL display, a light guide plate, or the like is arranged on the front side (player side) of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and an image on the transmissive display is displayed. A thing that changes the normal visibility in the non-transparent state to the special visibility in the state where the image is displayed or the state where the transmittance is lowered, superimposed on the front side of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. A reel that is provided with a movable object that can be made to move, a so-called accessory, and changes the normal visibility in which the movable object is not superimposed on the front side of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to a special visibility in which the movable object is superimposed. The color of the backlight, which is the normal visibility in which the backlight is arranged on the back side of the 2L, 2C, 2R symbols, etc., and the backlight is emitted in a normal color (white, etc.) and in a normal illuminance. It may be changed to a special visibility by changing the illuminance / brightness and turning on / off.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the sub-control unit 91 is performing an effect of changing the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the player side in the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, as a specific event. When it is detected that an abnormality such as a reel rotation error has occurred on the main control unit 41 side, the transmittance of all areas including the specific area of the transmission area 51b is set to 100% and specified by normal visibility. Although the configuration is such that the occurrence of an event is notified, the specific event is not limited to that detected by the main control unit 41, but is detected by the sub control unit 91, for example, an abnormality related to the sub control unit 91, or a sub control unit. It may be an abnormality related to each effect device controlled by 91, and when these abnormalities are notified by using the liquid crystal display 51, the transmittance of all the regions including the specific region of the transmission region 51b is set to 100%. It may be configured to notify with normal visibility. In such a configuration, when an abnormality occurs on the sub-control unit 91 side that is not directly related to the game, all the regions of the transparent region 51b are set to normal visibility, and the game progresses due to the abnormality. Can be avoided from being hindered.

In addition, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment changes the visibility of the reels in the predetermined region corresponding to the design of each reel through which the winning line LN passes out of the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 in the front effect during the game. It is a configuration that prohibits the execution of the effect to be performed for the entire period during the game, but in the front effect during the game, a prize is won for at least the period in which at least one reel is rotated for the progress of the game. Any configuration may be sufficient as long as it is prohibited to execute the effect in a predetermined area corresponding to the symbol of each reel through which the line LN passes, and even during the game, for example, after the start switch 7 is operated, During a delay period in which the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is delayed, or during a period in which the stop operation for stopping the reel is invalidated after the start of rotation of the reel is controlled to a frozen state, etc. During the period that is not directly related to the progress, it is possible to execute without prohibiting the execution of the effect of changing the visibility of the reel in the predetermined area corresponding to the symbol of each reel through which the winning line LN passes in the transmission area 51b. The configuration may be such that Even with such a configuration, at least during the period in which at least one reel is rotated for the progress of the game, the effect is executed in a predetermined area corresponding to the symbol of each reel through which the winning line LN passes. By prohibiting, as in the present embodiment, when a specific event occurs, the visibility of the entire area including the specific area of the transmission area 51b is ensured, and the situation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is facilitated. Can be grasped by.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment displays an image or the like in the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 even during a period in which the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are not rotating, so that the front surface of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be displayed. As a reel front effect that displays an image or the like superimposed on the reel, it is possible to execute the stopped front effect, and in a situation where the reel front effect is executed during the period when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are not rotated, as a specific event, Even when the possibility that an abnormality such as a medal jam error has occurred is detected on the main control unit 41 side, a specific event with normal visibility is set to 100% of the transmission rate of all areas including the specific area of the transmission area 51b. In the situation where the reel front effect is executed during the period when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are not rotated, when a specific event occurs, the liquid crystal display 51 indicates that the specific event has occurred. The status of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be easily grasped even when the notification is made by, and the reel front effect is executed regardless of whether the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating. When a specific event occurs in a situation, the control for notifying the specific event can be standardized.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the output state when a predetermined event occurs among the events that may cause an abnormality, such as when the output state of the door open detection switch 25 changes. A door command or the like capable of identifying a change is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the sub-control unit 91 is in the game and at least during the period during which the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating as the game progresses. When the predetermined event occurs in the situation where the front effect is being executed, the display mode of the liquid crystal display 51 is not changed based on the occurrence of the predetermined event, while the effect is produced. Effect The LED 52 is lit in a predetermined lighting mode indicating that the front door 1b is in the open state, and the speakers 53 and 54 output a predetermined sound indicating that the front door 1b is in the open state to output the front surface of the reel. Since the occurrence of a predetermined event is notified while continuing the production, the overall visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is notified as normal visibility according to the importance of the event in which an abnormality may have occurred. It is possible to set whether to perform notification while continuing the reel front effect.

When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment satisfies the standby condition and shifts to the standby state when the estimated end time (60 seconds in this embodiment) elapses without setting the number of bets after the end of one game. By transmitting a standby command to the sub-control unit 91 and receiving the standby command, the sub-control unit 91 executes a standby effect with the overall visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as normal visibility. Therefore, the situation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be easily grasped when the game is not played.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment can execute the demo effect and the power saving mode as the standby effect, and issues a standby command to the demo effect or the power saving mode selected in advance by operating the standby effect switch 57. Although it is configured to be executed when it is received, the sub-control unit 91 may be configured to include a plurality of types of standby effects or a configuration to include only one type. Further, in such a configuration, the overall visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may be the normal visibility in at least one type of standby effect.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of the predetermined winning combination that has been internally won is stopped on one winning line LN extending through the middle stages of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. However, since the combination of the symbols of the winning combination is stopped on the winning line LN, it is determined that the winning combination has won, but the winning line has a different game state, number of bets, etc. The configuration may change according to the situation. With such a configuration, even if the winning line changes according to the game state, if a specific event occurs while the reel front effect is being executed during the game, the reels 2L and 2C By setting the overall visibility of 2R as normal visibility to notify the occurrence of a specific event, the situation of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be easily grasped, and in any gaming state, etc. Even if there is, it is possible to standardize the control when notifying the specific event when the specific event occurs in the situation where the reel front effect is executed.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can detect a rotation error of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as a specific event, and the sub control unit 91 can detect a rotation error as a specific event. In this case, the transmittance of all the regions including the specific region of the transmission region 51b is set to 100%, and the occurrence of the rotation error is notified with normal visibility. Therefore, when the rotation error occurs as a specific event, the reel 2L, The situation of 2C and 2R can be easily grasped.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment irradiates the design of the reel corresponding to the see-through window 3 from the back side of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to change the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the reel LED55. With the liquid crystal display 51, a transmission region 51b is arranged at a position corresponding to the see-through window 3 on the front side (player side) of the 2L, 2C, and 2R, and an image or the like is superimposed on the front of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The reel LED 55 illuminates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back surface to function as a backlight for the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51.

In such a configuration, if the reel LED 55 is turned off in order to change the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the visibility of the image or the like displayed in the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 also deteriorates. Will end up.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment displays an image or the like in the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 on the front side (player side) of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, thereby displaying the transmission region 51b. By changing the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 arranged on the back surface of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R so as to blink the reel front effect for displaying an image or the like on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R areas corresponding to the above. It is possible to execute a backlight effect that changes the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and when the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 is changed in the backlight effect, the lighting mode is changed without turning off the reel LED 55. Since the reel LED 55 that functions as the backlight of the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is not turned off at all, the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the visibility of the transmission region 51b can be ensured.

In this embodiment, the reel LEDs 55 arranged on the back surfaces of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are configured to function as the backlight of the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, except for the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51. A transparent display device such as a self-luminous display (EL display, etc.) having transparency, a light guide plate having transparency and displaying an image by incident light, and the like on reels 2L, 2C, 2R. The reel LED 55 may function as a backlight of the transmissive display device by arranging it in front of the display device.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment displays an image or the like on the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 on the front side (player side) of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, and the reels 2L and 2C corresponding to the transmission region 51b. Reel 2L, 2C, 2R by changing the lighting mode of the reel LED55 arranged on the back of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R so as to blink, and the reel front effect that displays an image or the like superimposed on the area of 2R. It is possible to execute a backlight effect that changes the visibility of the reel LED 55, but when the reel front effect is being executed, the execution of the backlight effect may be restricted so that the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 is not changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 from being hindered.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment displays an image or the like on the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 on the front side (player side) of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, so that the reel 2L corresponding to the transmission region 51b is displayed. Reel 2L, 2C, by changing the lighting mode of the reel LED55 arranged on the back of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the reel front effect that displays an image or the like superimposed on the areas of 2, 2C and 2R. It is possible to execute a backlight effect that changes the visibility of 2R, and when changing the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 in the backlight effect in a situation where the reel front effect is not executed, the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 is set high. While controlling to repeatedly change the lighting and extinguishing with brightness, when changing the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 in the backlight effect in the situation where the reel front effect is being executed, the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 is changed. By controlling so as to repeatedly change between lighting at high brightness and lighting at low brightness, the lighting mode can be changed without turning off the reel LED 55. Therefore, in a situation where the reel front effect is being executed, the liquid crystal is displayed. Since the reel LED 55 that functions as the backlight of the transmission region 51b of the display 51 is not turned off at all, the visibility of the transmission region 51b can be maintained.

Since the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment always emits the reel LED 55 with high brightness except when the backlight effect is executed, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are in a state of constantly emitting high brightness except when the backlight effect is executed. Visibility and visibility of the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 can be ensured. In such a configuration, the reel LED 55 is constantly emitted with high brightness, and the transmittance of the transmittance region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is changed, for example, the transmittance is reduced from 100% to 20%. By reducing the amount of light transmitted through the reel LED 55 to the player side, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the brightness of the transmitting region 51b in the same manner as when changing the brightness of the reel LED 55 itself. ..

In this embodiment, the reel LED 55 is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R symbols corresponding to the see-through window 3, and the sub-control unit 91 is a plurality of LEDs constituting the reel LED 55. Since it is possible to change the lighting mode by changing the brightness of each LED to low brightness, the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 can be varied by independently controlling the light emission of each LED constituting the reel LED 55. Can be changed. In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 46, the brightness of three LEDs corresponding to one of the plurality of LEDs constituting the reel LED 55 is sequentially changed from the left to correspond to one. The backlight can be turned on so that it flows from left to right in each symbol, or one reel unit, reel 2L, 2C, 2R stage units (upper, middle, lower), reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as a whole. The lighting mode can be such that the backlight flows in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the diagonal direction.

Although examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to the present invention, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention. Needless to say.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which a bet number is set using medals and credits as a game value has been described, but a slot in which a game ball is used as a game value It may be applied to machines or fully credited slot machines that set bets using only credits as game value. When using a game ball as a game value, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when setting 3 as the number of bets in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. Corresponds to setting the number of bets using.

Further, the value is not limited to one using only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and for example, a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls can be used together. It may be. That is, it is possible to set the number of bets and play a game by using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls are generated when a prize is generated. A slot machine that can pay out any value may be applied.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, but is an example of another gaming machine. A pachinko gaming machine that plays a game by firing a game ball in the game area. For example, a transparent display such as a transparent liquid crystal display having a reel in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged on the outer periphery thereof. The control related to the transmission display device described in the above embodiment can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine in which the device is provided on the front side (player side) of the reel, and the same effect is obtained in this case as well. ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, but is an example of another gaming machine. A pachinko gaming machine that plays a game by firing a game ball into a game area, and is provided with a reel having a light emitting device capable of irradiating a plurality of types of identification information arranged on the outer periphery from the back surface, and is transparent. A transmissive display device such as a liquid crystal display is provided on the front side (player side) of the reel, and a pachinko gaming machine in which the light emitting device of the reel also functions as a backlight of the transmissive display device is also described in the above embodiment. The controls related to the reel LED described can be applied, and the same effect is obtained in this case as well.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 41 Main control unit 91 Sub control unit

Claims (1)

Equipped with a variable display unit that can variablely display multiple types of identification information that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
A winning determination means for determining whether or not a winning has occurred according to the identification information in a specific area of the display results derived to the variable display unit, and
Visibility changing means for changing the visibility of the display area in the variable display unit from normal visibility to special visibility, and
A change control means for executing change control for changing the visibility of a display area in the variable display unit by the visibility change means, and
A payout means capable of paying out the game medium to the outside when a prize is generated with the addition of the game medium after the display result is derived to the variable display unit.
The payout game medium detecting means for detecting the game medium paid out by the payout means, and
If the payout abnormality of the game medium is detected and generated by the payout game medium detection means in the period of variable display of the variable display unit, a dispensing abnormality informing means for informing the occurrence of the dispensing abnormality,
With
The change control means
It is possible to execute non-specific change control that changes the area other than the specific area in the display area of the variable display unit to a special visibility during the period during the variable display of the variable display unit as the game progresses.
When the occurrence of the payout abnormality is notified by the payout abnormality notification means in a situation where the non-specific change control is executed during the period during the variable display of the variable display unit with the progress of the game, the variable display unit is used. A slot machine that makes the visibility of the entire display area normal.

Images